Home

Owners Manual Pdf

1. a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 42 G8VA Fuel Door 43AC For 2 Amp Grey SCCM ward Fuse 43BE 10 Amp Red Corax Rearward Fuse 44AC For 10 Amp Red Rear View Mirror Aux Port Jumper ward Fuse 44BE 10 Amp Red IBS Rearward Fuse 45 10 Amp Red PCM Powertrain Control Module Fuel Pump Re lay 46 2 10 Amp Red ESC Module Stop Lamp Switch 47 e 10 Amp Red ORC Module Passenger Seat OCM 48 2 10 Amp Red SCCM 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 49 25 Amp Amplifier Clear 50 HC Micro Rad Fan 51 HC Micro Rad Fan Relay SER PAR 52 HC Micro Starter Relay 53 HC Micro Rear Window Defroster Relay 54 HC Relay Rad Fan Relay High 55 HC Micro Wiper ON OFF 56 HC Micro Wiper LO HI 57 G8VA Horn Relay 58 G8VA A C Clutch Relay 59 HC Micro HVAC Blower 60 HC Micro Fuel Pump 61 G8VA Run Relay 1 62 G8VA Run Relay 2 a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 63 HC Micro ASD 1 64 HC Micro ASD 2 65 G8VA Run Accy 1 Pop Up Driver Door Windo
2. o ooooooooo o 71 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 111 Daytime Running Lights 107 Dealer Service o oooo ooo oo o 336 Defroster Rear Window 140 Defroster Windshield 87 Delay Intermittent Wipers 111 Diagnostic System Onboard o o o o o 334 Dimmer Switch Headlight o o o o o 109 Dipsticks Power Steering oooooooooooooooo oo 254 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 353 Door AJats ertad reserse ae eor e aaa 157 Door Ajar Light ocio Rem eee 157 Door Loeks 23 5 err Shi RL Reine AU AA 25 Key Fob Emergency Key oooooooooo o 23 Door Locks Automatic 0 0 0 0000 eee eae 27 Door Opener Garage 1 0 0 0 000 r tensis 123 B MOM 25 Driving Through Flowing Rising Or Shallow Standing Watered ax oe ie a PRR Ee oe qus 251 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 132 Electric Remote Mirrors 0 00 Electronic Brake Control SysteM Traction Control System 2 6 0 000200 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Control ESC Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light Emergency Brake 408 INDEX IN Emergency In Case Of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 327 Hazard Warning Flasher 310 Jump Starting iia aia Wace 323 Overheating por es
3. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire A STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive
4. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public trans portation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improve ments to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manu factured Copyright O 2015 FCA US LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION coup CER EUR
5. Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber e The 9 1 1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if you are connected to an operable 1X voice data or 3G data network Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active and you are connected to an operable 1X voice data or 3G data network Assist Calls The ASSIST Button is used for contacting Roadside Assistance Vehicle Care and Uconnect Care The 9 1 1 Button connects you to emergency services to someone who can help Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you re driving and its location Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance e Uconnect Access Customer Care In vehicle support for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile features e Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other vehicle issues 9 1 1 Call Push the 9 1 1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II NOTE In case the 9 1 1 Call button is pushed in error there will be a 10 second delay before the 9 1 1 Call system initiates a call to a 9 1 1 operator To cancel the 9 1 1 Call connection push the 9 1 1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the touch screen WARNING ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road Some Uconnect Access services including 9 1 1 and Assist will NOT work without an operable 1X voice data
6. Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn eff
7. Flash Lights With Lock This feature lets you program the lights to flash when the doors are locked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Refer to Uconnect Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Unlock On 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Autolock This vehicle is equipped with Autolock If the vehicle is unlocked while the Key Fob is outside the vehicle and the door is not opened for 30 seconds the car will relock 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In To Lock The Doors Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock the doors The horn will chirp once and the park lights and turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlatch The Liftgate Push the LIFTGATE X5 button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the liftgate Push and hold the liftg
8. Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not replaced spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded in
9. Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade Use MOPAR SAE 0W 40 engine oil approved to FCA US Material Standard MS 12633 such as Pennzoil Ultra equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera tures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service sta tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter
10. Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle e Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freez ing e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emis sions Brake System To ensure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the br
11. IF EQUIPPED 313 Tire Service Kit Storage ooooo o o 313 O Tire Service Kit Components And Operation 314 310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel above the climate controls YA Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways Slow down and use the highest gear possible In city traffic While stopped put the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed In city traffic While moving shift into the highest gear possible to reduce engine RPM NOTE There are steps that you can tak
12. Program ming A Non Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 NOTE 2 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are prog
13. Ratio of section height to section width of tire or 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction or D means diagonal or bias construction 15 16 18 Rim diameter in inches in A STARTING AND OPERATING 269 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits 270 STARTING AND OPERATING HN EXAMPLE Load Identification Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire e XL Extra load or reinforced tire or e LL Light load tire or e C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN i
14. Voice Text Reply Uconnect will announce incoming text messages Push the Phone button Ke and say Listen Must have com patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system 1 Once an incoming text message is read to you push the Phone button After the beep say Reply 2 Listen to the Uconnect prompts After the beep repeat one of the pre defined messages and follow the system prompts PRE DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Yes Stuck in traffic See you later No o I ll be late me Okay Where are you I will be lt num Are you there ber minutes Call me yet late I ll call you I need See you in later directions number of I m on my way Can t talk right minutes I m lost now Thanks TIP Your mobile phone must have the full implementa tion of the Message Access Profile MAP to take advan tage of this feature For details about MAP visit UconnectPhone com 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming ssw gmap Nes cami zang text messages only To enable this feature on your Apple m iPhone follow these 4 simple steps Akpiane Mode UNE T ca OO JBL Flip Sync Contacts BB norscarons D BJ contar Center Uconnect Phone Favorites Do Not Disturb Phone Recents S General B ospuy Brightness All Contacts 0415076965 iPhone Notification Setting 1 Select Settings
15. Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed To open the liftgate push the LIFTGATE RELEASE switch 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI located under the right side of the tail panel which is When all doors are locked except for RKE transmitter located below the liftgate then pull the liftgate open with liftgate access Refer to Entering the Liftgate with the one fluid motion System Armed under Vehicle Security Alarm Sys tem for additional information The liftgate ajar icon will illuminate in the Driver Infor mation Display DID when the liftgate is open WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the 022271492 vehicle e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open Pull Up On The Liftgate make sure that all windows are closed and the NOTE The liftgate release switch will be ignored under climate control blower switch is set at high speed the following conditions Do not use the recirculation mode e When vehicle speed is not 0 MPH 0 km h a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS S
16. This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic sys tem malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is dropped below a specified level A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level chec
17. WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 021870401 Power Door Lock Switch If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Fob in the vehicle Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open and the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob NOTE The Door Unlock Indicator v will illuminate in the instrument cluster when one or both doors are unlocked Automatic Door Locks The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s
18. With Help or Never button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS This feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting press the Sync with GPS Time button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing 19 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Set Time Hours This feature will allow you to adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time button on the touchscreen must be unchecked To make your selection press the wow or buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time button on the touchscreen must be unchecked To make your selection press the wow or buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes
19. Yelp logo Yelp burst and related marks are registered Mon Fri 7 00 am 12 00 am ET a OF HOUR Sat 8 00 am 10 00 pm ET Sun 9 00 am 5 00 pm ET Uconnect Access Services Support 855 792 4241 Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS B STARTING PROCEDURES 444 260 0004 05 238 W TRACK USE 2x RR ina See 249 Normal Starting cocos o ss 238 Guidelines For Track Use If Engine Fails To Start 240 MW DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES After Starting ax oat XE US oS 241 Acceleration vrees boa xe ERO vice east ias 250 E MANUAL TRANSMISSION s esses 241 TRACH OM s oi co h dex eure ea Rar Hanan deg es 251 ohif ng c pae PES A ne Prendre 242 MW DRIVING THROUGH WATER 251 Recommended Shift Speeds 244 Flowing Rising Water oo o ooooo o 252 Skip Shift Indicator Light 244 Shallow Standing Water o oo o o 252 ll STREET RACE MODE IF EQUIPPED 245 M POWER STEERING 42 3 emen 253 B LAUNCH MODE 0000 247 Power Steering Fluid Check 254 236 STARTING AND OPERATING HN E PARKING BRAKE coccccococcococ oo 255 Tire Pressure cse Gh awe ey y e
20. that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 When adding engine coolant antifreeze We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of FCA Ma terial Standard MS 90032 e Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE e Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recom mended and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT
21. 0213004940 keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode re Emergency Key Removal move the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the Ignition Or Accessory On Message vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster Continued 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always WARNING Continued others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not remove the Key Fob from vehicle place the ignition in the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with ENTRY KEY Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode i A child could operate power windows other con The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor trols or move the vehicle ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The e Do not leave children or animals inside parke
22. 058372514 ESC Button 264 STARTING AND OPERATING HN ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC system Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode The ESC On mode should be used for most driving situations The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs ESC Full Off The ESC Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be used on any public roadways In this mode all TCS and ESC stability fea tures are turned OFF To enter the Full Off mode push and hold the ESC switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds a chime will sound the ESC OFF telltale will illuminate and the ESC OFF message will display in the vehicle cluster left of the odometer The ESC OFF message may appear in the Driver Information Display DID Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation To turn ESC ON again momentarily push the ESC switch WARNING With the ESC switched OFF the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESC mode is intended for off highway or off road only Sport Mode If Equipped Sport mode has reduced tract
23. INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS 16ZD 126 AA 2015 FCA US LLC All Rights Reserved Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC Ii First Editi
24. NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec tion Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position and stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi ately Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to Continued WARNING Continued protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Do not attempt to modify any part of
25. Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ter e Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 If you have any problems or require assistance please RNING Continued call toll free 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at iN HomeLink com for information or assistance after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without WARNING e Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage General Information while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Your motorized door or gate will open and close these safety features Call toll free 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people 1 This device may no
26. Uconnect Care button on the touchscreen 3 A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the details Signing up is easy Simply follow the steps above Or press the Apps W button on the touchscreen to Register By Web to complete the process using your smartphone or computer For further information visit www driveuconnect com please A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Mobile App 8 4A 8 4AN To link your internet radio accounts You re only a few steps away from using remote com 1 Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile mands and playing your favorite music in your car device 2 Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app 3 Press the app you d like to connect to your vehicle 4 Enter your login information for the selected app and press Link 5 Next time you re in your vehicle enable Bluetooth pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream your personalized music 0307077996 Mobile App 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IM NOTE e You can also complete this process on the web Simply visit moparownerconnect com log in and click Set Up Via Mobile Profile under Quick Links Once you download the app to your compatible mobile device you will also be able to start your vehicle and lock unlock its doors from virtually any where Voice Texting 8 4A
27. WARNING Continued other cargo up high enough to block the deploy ment of the SABICs The door trim below the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions SABICs need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Being too close to the SABICs during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Relying on the SABICs alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The SABICs work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions SABICs won t deploy at all Al Ways Wear your seat belt even though you have SABICs 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HE NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious to you but they will open during air bag deployment If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to fric tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals Th
28. XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 lb 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 lbs 68 kg 750 lbs 340 kg and 1400 lbs 635 kg 750 lbs 340 kg 650 lbs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 276 STARTING AND OPERATING HN 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle The follow ing table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and num ber and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo
29. controls for one second Vehicle will countdown from ten seconds and enter Hibernation Mode To Activate Hibernation Mode 1 Cycle the ignition switch to ACC 2 Select Hibernation mode within the Driver Information Display DID UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 NOTE You may push the RIGHT arrow button on the steering wheel controls during the countdown to abort Hibernation Mode To Deactivate Hibernation Mode 1 Push the RKE UNLOCK button to unlock the vehicle 2 Push the Keyless Push Button Ignition to the ON RUN position UCONNECT SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on Uconnect 8 4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And the center of the instrument panel that allow you to Buttons On The Faceplate rammable features access and change the customer programmable features O ee ee een NOTE Features can vary by vehicle depending on 2 Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate vehicle configuration 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL II Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru ment panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 push the center of the control knob one or m
30. gD Y Phone Manager Apps Settings Uconnect 8 4AN Navigation A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Uconnect Access 8 4AN WARNING ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road Some Uconnect Access services including 9 1 1 and Assist will NOT work without an operable 1X voice data or 3G data network connection NOTE Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho rized by the subscriber An included trial and or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next section of this guide To register with Uconnect Access press the Apps button on the 8 4 inch touchscreen to get started Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page NOTE Uconnect Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States Alaska and Hawaii Services can only be used where coverage is available see coverage map for details im 9 1 1 Call A Theft Alarm Notification fm Remote Door Lock Unlock 4 Stolen Vehicle Assistance 5 Remote Horn and Lights ua Yelp Search Voice Texting Roadside Assistance Call Wi Fi Hotspot Extra charges apply 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Register 8 4A 8 4AN To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your vehicle you first need to register with Uconnect Access 1 Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror 0401020352 2 Press the
31. or 3 button on the touch screen Then press the arrow back button on the touch screen e Surround Sound This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection press the Surround Sound button on the touchscreen select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen e Loudness Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes To make your selection press the Loudness button on the touchscreen then choose Yes or No The button will highlight indicating that the setting has been selected Press the back arrow Done button on the touchscreen e AUX Volume Offset This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 To make your selection press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen choose a level from 3 to 3 followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Paired Phones This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement Manual e Paired Audio Sources This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement Manual SiriusXM Setup If E
32. terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands Hibernation Mode after handling The Hibernation mode feature conserves battery power when storing the vehicle It allows for up to three months battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 of storage time without losing radio and engine control ler adaptive memory Using this feature is an alternative to disconnecting the battery NOTE This vehicle is designed to sit in storage with a fully charged battery for up to 30 days If you plan to store the vehicle longer than 30 days we recommend doing one of the following Disconnect the battery Use the battery charger e Put the vehicle into Hibernation mode 3 month charge To Activate Hibernation Mode 1 Cycle the ignition switch to ACC 2 Select Hibernation mode within the Driver Informa tion Display DID 3 Push the right arrow button on the steering wheel controls for one second Vehicle will countdown from ten seconds and enter Hibernation Mode NOTE You may push the right arrow button on the steering wheel controls during the countdown to abort Hibernation Mode To Deactivate
33. 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 elojol oeoljojol olo jol o o ol oj ojolo Ss isis isisisisisisije olojeloje joljeojejelejoe ea elejo Or Kilometers ajs ajoejala a Ss a a a e a a a e e a ea e ume ja Q9 Q i sleleisisielelsisisieisisisieisieisisis eisigi is TPN OPT OH OPM OPO 2 Ele el etl el e ele lel al NINI alata Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even x x xy Fx Ex Ix EXIXIXIXIXIXIXIXIXIXIXIXIXIXIXIXIXIXI X if it occurs before scheduled maintenance x lt x lt x lt x lt x x x x lt x lt x lt x x x x x lt x x lt x lt x x lt x lt x lt x x x Inspect the brake linings re place if necessary A x X X X x A x x x Xx X Inspect the exhaust system X X X X X X X X X X X X Change Brake Fluid X X X X X x Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four X X X X X wheel disc brakes MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 389 Miles 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 36 000 42 000 48 000 54 000 60 000 66 000 72 000 78 000 84 000 90 000 96 000 Or Months k N N A wo o e o A N A a A 1 1 Or Kilometers 10 000 o 6 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 7
34. 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only Temporary high pressure com pact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 268 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Example Size Designation P215 65R15XL 95H 215 65R15 96H LT235 85R16C T145 80D18 103M 31x10 5 R15 LT P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards or blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards or LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards or T or S Temporary spare tire or 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 235 145 Section width in millimeters mm 65 85 80 Aspect ratio in percent
35. Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled auto matically if these modes are selected Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro sion protection and to protect against engine overheating OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and concen tration of coolant is used Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 coolant selection Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service Le vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air with the blower setting in high This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging and Frosting Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in mild rainy and or humid weather Windows may frost on the inside of the glass
36. Hibernation Mode 1 Push the RKE UNLOCK button to unlock the vehicle 2 Push the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN WARNING CAUTION Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling Warranty Information Book located on the DVD R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro for further warranty information carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental The air conditioning system contains refrigerant Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How under high pressure To avoid risk of personal ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant service be performed by authorized dealer or other or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected service facilities using recovery and rec
37. INSTRUMENT PANEL HE and the navigation system if equipped Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen and then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Units This feature will allow you to have the DID odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Press US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Touchscreen Beep This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed Press the Touchscreen Beep button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Control Screen Time Out If Equipped When this feature is selected the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out With the feature deselected the screen will stay open until it is manually closed Press the Control Screen Time Out button on the touchscreen until a check
38. Jumper Black B Jumper 12 25 Amp Clear ABS ESP Valve Feed 13 20 Amp Yel Horn low 14 10 Amp Red A C Clutch 15 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Fuel Door Stop Switch 16 15 Amp KIN RF Hub Blue 17 25 Amp cir Power Seats cuit breaker 18 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Mod a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 19 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Mod 20 30 Amp Pink Rear Window Defroster 21 20 Amp Blue Wiper 22 Jumper Black B Jumper 23 15 Amp HVAC MOD Cluster ICS Switch Bank Blue 24 25 Amp PCM Powertrain Control Module Clear 25 25 Amp Fuel Pump Clear 26 20 Amp Yel ASD 1 low 27 20 Amp Yel ASD 2 low 28 Spare 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 29 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower 30 20 Amp Yellow RR Power Outlet Adj Pedals UCI 31 Jumper Black B Jumper 32 Spare 33 20 Amp Blue Run Acc relay 34 Jumper Black B Jumper 35 Spare 36 10 Amp Red ORC Mod Run 37 15 Amp Cluster Camera Blue 38 20 Amp Yel Active Damping Suspension low 39 10 Amp Red HVAC Module In Car Temp Blower Relay 40 Spare 41 G8VA Run Start
39. Lock button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the Key Fob Lock button is pressed To make your selection push the Sound Horn With Remote Lock button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When Driver Door is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks only the driver s door will unlock with the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button You must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks All Doors all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door is pro grammed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entr
40. M UCONNECERADIOS 1P HOUR BEE spaces 208 DID Display 2 pe cane apra 172 M tod USE MES CONTROL 1E ROU cs eo 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE ll STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS 204 Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Radio Operation ccce 205 Conditions 42 n Rd e RR e Res 214 E RADIO ANTENNA LLL 206 E PERSONALIZED MENU BAR 215 ll RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES 206 m AN cue o Mii 215 General Information llle 206 Introducing Uconnect o o uioun 215 I SETTE CON IROL o iaa dulce 206 Get Started vicio 216 Automatia Temperature ontot Ode suse 2 Basic Voice Commands 217 O eed Ree tace ea a Kills cos trantoncssevntennsieencs 218 WI RHO ca TOS SERE CHA SER Ela o nae 219 e iw Pak rey legi su ela Phone noaoo aiaiaaeo rra 220 e i a eo Seabee es em Voice Text Reply isses eese 221 Outside Air Intake o o o o o oo o 213 Climate BAAN s os lt csceseseacseesee 223 Navigation B4AN o oooooo ooo o 224 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 Uconnect Access B4AN llle 225 SiriusXM Travel Link 8 4AN 231 Register 8 4A 8 4AN 00 226 Siri Eyes Free If Equipped 231 Mobile App 8 4A 84
41. Malfunction Indicator Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Electronic Stability Control ESC Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Stability Control ESC Indicator Light The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the ve hicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected ee e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the
42. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued 290 STARTING AND OPERATING HN TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES Due to limited clearance tire chains or traction devices are not recommended CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase t
43. VEHICLE 365 Rear Wing If Equipped Water may drain slowly from the ends of the wing after washing or exposure to rain this is normal Opening the Do not operate the vehicle with the rear wing removed liz vilbespedite dianie The aerodynamic balance of this set up is unstable and l f control can cause a loss of contro WARNING Use extra caution when closing the rear deck lid on a vehicle equipped with a rear wing Due to the added weight of the rear wing the deck lid will close at a higher rate of speed and can cause injury Carbon Fiber If Equipped The clear coated carbon fiber panels will have some variation and minor waviness in the woven pattern This is inherent to the process and a sign of its authenticity All carbon fiber materials are susceptible to UV degra Rear Wing dation during long exposure to the sun The woven carbon components use the latest technology in the resin 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN system and the clear coat As with any automotive WARNING Continued coating storing your vehicle in a covered location will guarantee a long lasting finish material Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury fire and or property dam The rear wing is molded with unidirectional carbon fiber age and painted in body color Some patterned or linear e Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition conditions may be visible in the painted carbon fiber is off and
44. a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 e Block the wheels Do not apply the parking brake Then either disconnect the battery at the negative terminal or use the Battery Save Feature to conserve battery power Refer to Maintenance Procedures Battery Save Feature in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information e Cut blocks of plywood about the same size of the tires Cover each block with indoor outdoor carpeting and place them between the tires and concrete This will prevent tire flat spotting e Cover the vehicle whenever possible to prevent acci e For long term storage remove the tires and put the 2 E i P dental damage to the finish vehicle up on blocks Stack the tires on plywood and cover with a tarp to prevent flat spotting NOTE Disconnecting the battery causes the engine con trol system to lose memory of some learned functions After reconnecting the battery the engine may run rough until the control module relearns these functions Us ing the Battery Save Feature will prevent the engine controller from loosing its memory f the vehicle will be subjected to freezing tempera tures either remove the battery and store it in a dry well ventilated area or connect a trickle charger 1 5 Amp with automatic shutdown overcharge protec tion to the battery However do not leave the trickle charger hooked up to the battery without being plugged in to a 110 Volt AC outlet as this will result in furth
45. all times Center Console Outlet NOTE Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicles battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Continued 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Continued e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution e After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery Auxiliary Jumper Harness The Viper is e
46. allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedal to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel Adjustable Pedals Switch 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Push the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim NOTE ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF e Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full WARNING pedal travel Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked e Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat pedal position n UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Adjustable Foot Rest To adjust the pedal This feature allows the driver to adjust the foot rest 1 Adjust the seat and steering column to a comfortable forward or backward and to rotate it upward or down position ward to allow for greater driving comfort 2 Using a socket wrench loosen the nut on the pedal EJ 3 Slide the pedal
47. as possible by an authorized dealer security protection The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position NOTE Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer This procedure consists of program ming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System ser viced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the followi
48. at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE Selection Of Coolant CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant CAUTION properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than needed to be added to the system please contact your specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en local authorized dealer gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to ant is different and should not be mixed with MS 90032 Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coo
49. check when the ignition is first turned on If the light does not turn on during starting have it repaired promptly This light also illuminates at vehicle start up to indicate that the ABS self check is in process If the light remains on after start up or turns on and remains on at road speeds it may indicate a system malfunction or that the system is inoperative In this case the system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes If this occurs safely bring 262 STARTING AND OPERATING HN the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible and cycle the ignition to attempt to reset the ABS If the light remains on see your authorized dealer immediately to have the system serviced Also if the BRAKE Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on and the parking brake is fully released see your authorized dealer immediately Traction Control System TCS The TCS system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability Electronic Stability Control In full on mode the TCS system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for oversteering and under steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appro priate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of
50. coolant conforming to MS 90032 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to insure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the Continued a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 WARNING Continued engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance
51. could prevent vehicle registration C For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is noton when 2 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine NOTE If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over position you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 3 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will rem
52. e Battery e Coolant Temperature e RIGHT Arrow Button Restore To Defaults Restores All Settings To Default Settings gt Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to confirm Digital Speed e On e Off Tach Peak Hold When enabled the Tach Peak Hold function marks the peak Revolutions Per Minute RPM on the tachometer gauge for 3 seconds when the RPM is above 4000 Using the UP and DOWN arrow switches on the left side of the steering wheel select the gauges icon from the menu on the left side of the cluster highlighted red is the active menu item Use the RIGHT arrow to enter the gauges setup screen and the UP DOWN arrows to select Tach Peak from the menu of gauge options 41 Restore Defaults Digital eed feck Peak Hoa um Left Upper Right 3794 mi Tach Peak Hold A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 Select up and down to toggle between ON and OFF WARNING Continued can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of SRT Performance others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the SRT icon is highlighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and 0 60 MPH Duration will be displayed Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the following information sub menus Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor mance Features is intended for o
53. eee ee RES 85 Child Restraint sce o aa 72 Child Restraints Booster Seats css eser be bk e 77 Child Restraints o o o o ooooooooooo 72 Infants And Child Restraints 75 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Bell ege hes be dae ed baht deos eds 78 Older Children And Child Restraints 75 Using The Top Tether Anchorage 81 Clean Air Gasoline es os os es 9s 297 Cleaning Wheels s aegea abe a hes alae Re don al Eee ck 360 Windshield Wiper Blades 345 Climate Control 0 0 0 o o 206 Clutch FIuldiz s aude ae 358 Compact Spare li sss ses aere 284 Contract Service sud e da Ege 397 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 352 Gooling System eg e CHR PE Denn 349 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 351 Coolant Capacity esd ereak a aae ee ooo 380 Coolant Level 349 353 Disposal Of Used Coolant 353 Drain Flush And Refill 350 Inspect n 244 Shere eden Ed exe ER 353 Points To Remember o o ooo o oo 354 Pressure Cap atar pd oet Mem 352 Radiator Cap 0 44 424 0885 esee Rcs 352 Selection Of Coolant Antifreeze 350 380 381 a INDEX 407 Corrosion Protection o ooo oo 359 Cruise Lig Niss sinebat piratas as Sage ads 168 CupholdetS 4 200 ERE RUE EX e des 136 Customer Assistance o ooo ooo 395 Data Recorder Event
54. equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Automatic Temperature Control ATC Buttons On The Touchscreen Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect system touchscreen 9 The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect touchscreen ott isos 259 0 09 0 0 O gt xr ifm 0415075282 Uconnect Temperature Controls Automatic Climate Controls 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Button Descriptions Applies To Both Buttons On The Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen 1 MAX A C Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when MAX A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the MAX A C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A C indicator will turn off 2 A C Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the A C operation to switch into manual mode and the A C indicator will turn off 3 Recirculation Bu
55. for braking data Engine Options A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 e Save Pressing the Save button will let you save the last run Any saved run over 10 will overwrite the last saved run for Uconnect System storage The operation of the Save feature is listed below e With a USB jump drive installed press the USB button to save runs to the jump drive With an SD Card installed press the SD Card to save runs to the SD Card e e Press the Uconnect button to save the runs to the Owner web page e Press the Cancel button to view the last timer Ticket The Tickets contain the timers listed below e 0 60 MPH 0 100 km h Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph 0 to 100 km h e Mile 200 meter Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an Mile 200 meters e 14 mile 400 meter Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an 1 4 mile 400 meters e Brake Distance Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full stop Contains current and last data for distance and start from speed 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN NOTE The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a complete stop e Brake Speed Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the brake pedal is depressed NOTE Brake Distance and Speed timers will o
56. forecast e Show extended weather TIP Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com mand Travel Link PL m Fuel Prices Weather Movie Listings b My Favorites Subscription Sirtusxm Weather Map TREN e Climate a d ti nll WD Radio 0307077993 Media Phone Manager Apps Settings SiriusXM Travel Link Siri Eyes Free If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free you can use your voice to send text messages schedule meetings set reminders and more 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Do Not Disturb With Do Not Disturb you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel For your conve nience there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message a call or both when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail Automatic reply messages can be e Tam driving right now I will get back to you shortly e Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac ters NOTE Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the touchscreen while typing a custom message While in Do Not Disturb Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being inter rupted by incoming calls NOTE Reply with t
57. h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km h e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Accelerate For Passing Push the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE If the accelerated speed goes above 10 mph 16 km h of the set speed the Electronic Speed Control will deactivate PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever gear selector is put into REVERSE The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear NOTE The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro grammable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature and it is turned ON the rear camera image will be displayed for up
58. hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set buttons 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN RADIO ANTENNA The am fm radio antenna is located in the windshield The Satellite Navigation antenna is located in the rear liftgate while the cellular phone antenna is on the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES Under certain conditions the mobile device being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile device antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile device operation when not using Uconnect if equipped General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the
59. has been reached 030971330 Power Seat Recliner Switch WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Continued 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING Continued e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Non Adjustable Head Restraints The non adjustable head restraints are form fitted into the upper structure of the seatback and are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact The seatback should be properly adjusted to an upright position where the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of your head WARNING Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stab
60. have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French 398 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related conce
61. ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale What It Means Light Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means e AU Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light p Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light What It Means Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose Properly close the filler cap to disen gage the light If the light does not turn off please see your authorized dealer Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pre
62. in Mainte nance Procedures for further information a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Serviced at Authorized Dealer LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Serviced at Authorized Dealer Serviced at Authorized Dealer LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer W3W LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Message Center Indicators Cluster Gauge Pack Heater Control Interior Lamp Courtesy Foot Well Lights Cargo Lamp Coupe Liftgate 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ma Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Low High Beam Headlamp HID Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Park Turn Signal Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Daytime Running Lamp DRL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Side Marker Lamp 2821M Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Tail Stop Turn Signal Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Marker Lamp 2821M Backup Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer License Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Front Headlamp Front Park Turn Signal Lamp For bulb replacem
63. in the passenger seat and for most properly installed child restraint systems However under certain conditions even with a properly installed child restraint system the PAD Indicator Light may not be illuminated even though the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deacti vated This can occur if the child restraint is lighter than the lightest weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator Light NEVER assume the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF If the PAD Indicator Light is Illuminated for an Adult Passenger If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger seat and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated the passenger may be sitting improperly Follow the steps below to allow the OCS to detect the adult passenger s seated weight to activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag 1 Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger step out of the vehicle 2 Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat such as cushions pads seat covers seat massagers blankets extra clothing etc 3 Place the seatback in the full upright position a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 4 Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the seat with the passenger s feet comfortably on or near the WARNING floor and with their back against the seatback Never place a rear facing child restraint in front
64. in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Drive Ve hicle CAUTION The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so it should be handled carefully e Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321 D Drive Vehicle Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h WARNING Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h until the tire is repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you E After Driving Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop to Use Tire Service Kit before continuing 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Air Mode position 2 Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet 3 Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at
65. is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 396 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the m
66. mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster If Equipped When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the DID as the vehicle approaches a A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 designated turn within a programmed route To turn on or enable press the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate Voice After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length press the Brief or Detailed button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Show Command List When in this display you may choose to Always With Help or Never display the Teleprompter with possible options while in a voice session To change the Show Command List settings press the Always
67. more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity 286 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING
68. mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat ing speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires 282 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when flat e The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not rep
69. must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Aero Group Front Splitter If Equipped fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric The front splitter will not flex or compress against If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or impacts from the front If an impact does occur have the lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to splitter inspected A cracked or delaminated splitter wash them Dry with a soft cloth should be replaced 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Use care when approaching parking blocks tall speed bumps and garage curbs These surfaces can damage your splitter and fascia Use caution when driving up to sloped surfaces or over speed bumps Approaching a speed bump or a slope at a slight angle may improve your clearance CAUTION e Hard contact with steep ramps may cause damage to your splitter and fascia 2 Front Splitter Always leave ample room and be sure to educate anyone you allow to operate the vehicle 0741012022 e Replace rub strips when they are worn down to 1 8 inch 3 mm on the front edge This will avoid damage to the carbon fiber panel Refer to the ACR Owner s Manual Supplement for information specific to the ACR MAINTAINING YOUR
70. oococcoooo o 299 Materials Added To Fuel 299 Fuel System Cautions o oo oo oooo o 300 Carbon Monoxide Warnings ll ADDING FUEL Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ll TRAILER TOWING ll RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground ll GROUND CLEARANCE 238 STARTING AND OPERATING HN STARTING PROCEDURES CAUTION Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct any other occupant to buckle their seat belt WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the Key Fob in Normal Starting CAUTION The engine in your vehicle is designed for operation Long periods of engine idling especially at higher than normal engine idle speeds can cause exces sive exhaust temperatures which can damage your vehicle Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running e Running an engine with a low oil level can cause severe damage Check the engine oil level at every fuel fill up or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
71. should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended CAUTION Some aftermarket air cleaners and filters can cause mass air flow sensor issues which can lead to a driveability problem or a limp home condition M
72. similar tool as shown section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren 2 Move the seatback to its full forward position LATCH Restraint System for the location of ap proved tether anchorages in your vehicle MW Y 0226047162 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In 022671501 j 022671502 Child Seat Tether Access Cover Child Seat Tether Anchor NOTE While the child tether is in use keep the access cover in a safe place so that it can be replaced after use of the child tether THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 4 Pass the child restraint tether hook through either 7 Return the seatback to an upright position opening in the seatback underneath the head restraint 8 Remove slack from the tether strap according to the 5 Attach the tether hook to the anchor loop child restraint manufacturer s directions ES WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly be hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly Tether Hook injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in 6 Move the seat to its farthest rearward position Apply 4 collision body pressure to the seat to be sure the seat adjusters pets sho
73. soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat Continued 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 4 on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and place the ignition in the OFF position Set the parking brake B Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit T Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Sealant Mode position Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire 4 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 5 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The De
74. the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a mal function in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc tion is detected that could affect the air bag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
75. the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 Cooling System WARNING When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the igni tion switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an authorized dealer Check the front of the A C condenser radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser radiator Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection
76. the headlights will turn on after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds programmable when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 If you turn the headlights or parking lights on or place the ignition in ACC or RUN the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature e The headlight delay time is programmable using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation Dayti
77. these products contain high concentrations performance e The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per formance and damage the emissions control sys tem of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or system can result in civil penalties being assessed against some light smoke your engine may be out of tune you or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can ADDING FUEL 5 kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an exten
78. to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Continued with a rear seat e Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled PAD Indicator Light The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instru ment panel tells the driver and front passenger when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated The PAD Indicator light illuminates the words PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the PAD indicator light is NOT illuminated 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passen ger seat The driver and adult passenger should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult is not seated properly the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may deactivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated for most properly seated and restrained children
79. up or down Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen e Time Format This feature will allow you to select the time format display setting Press the Time Format button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate Safety amp Driving Assistance If Equipped After pressing the Safety amp Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e ParkView Backup Camera Delay When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned OFF the rear camera mode is exited and the previous screen appears again When the vehicle is A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned ON the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph 12 km h the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the settings button then the Safety amp Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen Press the Parkview Backup camera Dela
80. vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi nated as this may result in further damage Such tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during Continued parking maneuvers The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost 254 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be av
81. within the version limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the Performance Pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which To access the SRT Performance Pages press the Apps can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of button on the touchscreen then select the SRT Perfor others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can mance Pages App from the list Press the UP or DOWN prevent accidents buttons on the touchscreen to cycle through the list e System Information SRT Performance Pages 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN CAUTION The following describes each feature and its operation Ti Check engine oil level at every fuel fill up Running ci an engine with a low oil level can cause severe When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to engine damage Engine oil level must be maintained Select from following Tickets within the safe zone on the engine oil dipstick or e Current severe engine damage may occur Refer to the Main tenance Schedule for further information Pressing the Current button displays a real time summary of performance timers The SRT Performance Pages include the following e Tast H i Gin Pressing the Last button displays the last recorded run Timers of performance timers e G Force e Best Gauges 1 Pressing the Best button displays the best recorded run o Gauges 2 of performance timers except
82. 0 000 80 000 90 000 100 000 8 110 000 Q 120 000 Y 130 000 i 140 000 150 000 S 160 000 170 000 Q 102 000 180 000 108 000 190 000 114 000 200 000 S 120 000 210 000 X 126 000 220 000 Y 132 000 230 000 8 138 000 240 000 amp 144 000 250 000 Y 150 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter x lt x lt x lt x x x lt x lt x x lt x x lt x x x x lt x x lt x lt x x lt x x lt x lt x lt x Change the manual transmis sion fluid x x x Inspect the manual transmis sion fluid add as necessary Change the rear axle fluid Inspect front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper loose ness or end play replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if necessary 390 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN 000 0S B ooo osz gt lt x 000 rrl x OO0 0vZ x 000 8 L 8 ooo oez x O00 ZEL amp ooo ozz x 000 9z1 amp ooo oLz x 000 02L Q 000 00z x x 000 bLL 000 061 gt lt 000 801 S 000 08L x 000Z0L S 000 0ZL x 000 96 S
83. 000 09L x x 000 06 S 000 0SL x 000 v8 3 000 0b1 gt lt 000 282 000 0 L x 000 24 Q 000 0Z3L gt lt 00099 8 000011 gt lt 000 09 000 00L x 000 pS Z 00006 x 000 sv R 00008 x 000 zb X 000 07 x 000 9 S 00009 x 000 0 Q 00008 x 000 bz 000 0b x 000 8L 000 0 x 000 ZL X 000 0z x 000 9 000 0L gt lt o E 58 o OS ac S 8leaa o amp LE 5 x g S E sx o P oclo 9 Gt 2 7 oe nx t E o9 o SSZ x 9 oc o s coco9 o Q ee Sca 9 7 Soa 9596 s 6 6 lo5 i i88 The spark plug change interval is mileage based only monthly intervals do not apply a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 391 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech YOUR VEHICLE se r xen ru Ra 395 Impaired TDD TTVD oo oo om o oo 397 Prepare For The Appointmen
84. 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 99 al UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you would like to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand held transmitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the fre quency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Non Rolling Code To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with
85. 2 Select Bluetooth 3 Select the i for the paired vehicle 4 Turn on Show Notifications a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 TIP Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free you can use your voice to send a text message Climate 8 4AN Too hot Too cold Adjust vehicle temperatures hands free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead Push the VR button Ave After the beep say one of the following commands e Set temperature to 70 degrees TIP Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle 10 10 54 ou C AUTO Setting temperature to 70 J NN re HOM E O Media Phone Manager Apps Settings Climate Uconnect 8 4AN Climate D a Radio 0307077995 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Navigation 8 4AN The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go 1 To enter a destination push the VR button Ave After the beep say e For the 8 4AN Uconnect System say Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills Michigan 2 Then follow the system prompts TIP To start a POI search push the VR button t NR After the beep say Find nearest coffee shop Pa A x Where To View Map Information Emergency Settings Detour Repeat E
86. 2 ig pomeres i Rad ee 401 Radial aeeoea ei aia ara taa 281 Replacements sedrer ds high Bee Hones eS 288 Rotation 202 G4 694428229 anne ida Stans ads 290 Safety s dede Ras doles URS S E duca 266 278 SIZES a PR Deuda Dane ew a 268 Opinnimpg aos deu erben RO aes NOR AS S Res 286 Tread Wear Indicators lll 286 Tire Safety Information 0 0 266 Tire Service Kits ee ure eee a a eae a SS 313 TOWING e ic ces args entit Rr ey 306 329 Disabled Vehicle o o ooo o oo 329 Recreational o 306 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome 306 Traction ce ed a eda Be RR as 250 251 Traction Control iid eme bt RE eae aa 262 Trailer TOWING o 6 9 steed ap Sone So SER Ea 306 Transmission 0 o 357 Fidi secet nieder etaed d 383 SHINE sings alec e ene Rs 241 244 418 INDEX IN Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 23 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 23 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Transporting Pets iii ee RR Ree d 83 Tread Wear Indicators o o oo oo oo oo 286 Turn Signals cio ta der rer aer a RC s 108 167 Uconnect Operation i sce ig ted uw d art e eds 203 Uconnect SettingS oooooooooooooomoo 28 Uconnect Voice Command 004 215 Uniform Tire Quality Grades o o o o 401 Universal Transmitter o o o ooooo ooo 123 Unleaded Gasoline o
87. 240 Fluid Capacities se ecas cha naa ee wala DESS 380 Fud Leaks 23 used dde xus 88 Fluid Level Checks Brake a gib eub PLA hon Be oe E 355 383 Capades s ose utes ttt eoe cu ed 380 Clutch Fluid regc ces 358 Cooling System llle 349 Eng Oll icio s ron dde 337 Manual Transmission 357 383 Power Steering oas rosanne npu a rh 254 383 Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 381 Four Way Hazard Flasher o o o o o o 310 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle o 327 lud I ca i eas wa ae 297 AO GIU Ves utens ce sige a a ee ke 299 Clean AiE acia Sealed ale a x fers 297 Ethanol e carat a A Ieee td 298 Gasolinera ca tiaord odio dg Of ead 297 ita nt o io id dagas 165 Materials Added 2 0 0 oo momo 299 Methanol 35 ia nas GPa a hee 298 Octane Rating inicios sic RR pintats 297 381 Requirements o ooooooooooooooooo 297 380 Tank Capacity 5s sc acte Ree RP a E 380 Fus Si 2il2eidw desde ue ROSE OE 3 eg 366 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 123 130 Gasoline Clean Air llle 297 Gasoline Fuel llle 297 Gasoline Reformulated 297 General Information 0 000000 ee 206 Glass Cleaninb es hasta ee e La nae ns 362 Ground Clearances s ersed aiaei ne o 307 410 INDEX IN Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising Or Shallow Standing Water i diss citarse de 251 Hazard Warning Flasher ssi tan emase ma
88. 5 Seat Belt System cio iii da eek 33 Seat Belt Maintenance 00 002 eee 363 Seat Belt Reminder 0 00 00 eee eae 35 Seat Belts 0 ee ene 34 87 Child Restraint ss 3 4 060 344 so e440 es ead bans 72 Extender unica ae ead ga PX ee oes 42 ErfontS5eat re Gce aed 34 36 39 INSPOCUON 3 co deba S Beg did Bae 87 Operating Instructions ooooooooo o 39 Pregnant Women o oo ooooooooooooooosos 43 Pretensioners llle 43 Rear Seat 2 49 202 635 Rata eae EPOR Row AE 36 Reminder lees 148 416 INDEX In Untwisting Procedure o o o o o oooo ooo 41 C RCM CC rM 98 Adjustment 2c ELTE IA Res 98 100 Reclining ies dades rs eee e Dep ea 99 Security Alarm bem dE REX d er REY ES 17 152 Selection Of Coolant Antifreeze 381 Selection OF Oll 4 44 2k Pd daa Ou 338 SENTRY KEY FCC General Information less 16 Key Programming 0 0 00 oo o 16 Sentry Key Immobilizer o ooo o ooooo 14 Sentry Key Replacement 004 15 Service Assistance 0 0 00 i ee eee 395 Service Contract serraria anaa aaea i a 397 Service Manuals 400 Shift Indicator Light 244 o A ni cilia wae aie d 241 244 Shoulder Belts 1 5 dev Sek ee AES ea ee Ye 36 Signals WO usu eR ar dees a dea Rn 88 108 167 Snow Chains Tire Chains 00 290 Spare Tite e he tae OR ra eae o a
89. 7 45 50 km h 27 72 80 Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired acceleration rate Skip Shift Indicator Light There are times when you must shift the trans mission directly from first gear into fourth gear instead of from first gear into second gear This is to help you get the best possible fuel economy from your vehicle This occurs when engine A STARTING AND OPERATING 245 coolant is higher than 107 F 42 C and vehicle speed is greater than 16 mph 26 km h but less than 18 mph 29 km h and engine speed is less than 1 550 RPM and the transmission is in first gear and the accelerator is at 20 throttle or less The Skip Shift Indicator Light located in the tachometer will illuminate during these times When the Skip Shift Indicator Light illuminates the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from first gear to fourth gear After you shift the transmission into fourth gear you can press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life down shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep grade CAUTION If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or downshift at too high a vehicle speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch WARNING Skipping more than one gear while downshifting could cause you to lose c
90. 8 4AN 1 To send a message push the Phone button Ye After the beep say the following command Send mes sage to John Smith Listen to the prompt After the beep dictate the message you would like to send Wait for Uconnect to process your message 3 The Uconnect system will repeat your message and provide a variety of options to add to delete send or hear the message again After the beep tell Uconnect what you d like to do For instance if you re happy with your message after the beep say Send You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a compatible MAP enabled smartphone to use your voice to send a personalized text message For details about MAD visit UconnectPhone com Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone follow these 4 simple steps emro mam nin mme ae osm nwm lt Uconnect Settings Bluetooth Airplane Mode Bluetooth T g wr PD Cosar HM1300 JBL Fip Sync Contacts S notscarons D ne E Control Center Uconnect Phone Favorites Do Not Disturb Phone Recents S senora B ospur a Brightness All Contacts 0415076965 iPhone Notification Setting 1 Select Settings 2 Select Bluetooth 3 Select the i for the paired vehicle 4 Turn on Show Notifications UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 TIP Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone but if your vehi
91. AINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is vented and must be replaced with a vented battery The battery is located underneath an access panel inside the rear compartment on the left side of the vehicle A remote battery terminal is located in the engine compart ment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Proce dures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information To gain access to the battery remove the floor portion of the rear compartment carpet Battery Location 1 Positive Battery Post 2 Negative Battery Post 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid battery that the positive cable is attached to the to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean positive post and the negative cable is attached to over a battery when attaching clamps If acid the negative post Battery posts are marked positive splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme and negative and are identified on the diately with large amounts of water e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts
92. AN 00 227 Do Not Disturb 232 Voice Texting 8 4A 8 4AN o ooo oo o o 228 General Information o o 233 Yelp 8 4A 8 4AN 0 0 00 0 0000 ee eee 229 Additional Information 234 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 0401005323 1 Air Outlet 6 Passenger Air Bag 11 Climate Controls 2 Sound System Speaker 7 Glove Compartment 12 Dimmer Controls 3 Instrument Cluster 8 Uconnect System 13 Headlight Switch 4 Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop Button 9 Uconnect System Hard Controls 5 Glove Compartment Lock 10 Switch Bank Screen Off Hazard Switch Back Button INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 180 200 160 140 k 120 M Instrument Cluster UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 0403076945 145 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE 1 Speedometer CAUTION e Indicates vehicle speed Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads e Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle RPM x 1000 with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealer for service 2 Tachometer 3 Temperat
93. ARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor Refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description under Occupant Restraints for ad ditional information on ALR Lap Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 0226039335 e ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 weight weight of the child re straint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint What is the weight limit child s Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a for ward facing child restraint up to aT the recommended weight limit of the child restraint tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Installing A Child Restraint with A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor A
94. ARTING YOUR VEHICLE IN addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure The SABICs are located in the door trim below the side windows The trim covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG 0226043915 Supplemental Door Integrated Side Air Bag Label The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events The SABICs deploy upward covering the side windows An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag SABICs are designed to activate in certain side impacts The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the deployment of the SABIC in a particular impact event is appropriate based on the severity and type of collision The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events The system is calibrated to deploy the SABIC on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 SABIC occupant protection In side impacts the SABICs deploy independently a left side impact deploys the left side SABIC onl
95. Air Bag is activated or deacti vated If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF when an adult is in the front passenger seat have the passenger reposition his or her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light goes out If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger s seated weight on the front passenger seat The front passenger s seated weight must be properly positioned on the front passenger seat Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death The OCS deter mines the most probable classification of the occupant that it detects The OCS will detect the front passenger s decreased or increased seated weight which may result in deactivation or activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly Decreasing the front passen ger s seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in deactivation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag causing serious injury or death Increasing the front passenger s seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Examples of improper front passenger seating include The front passenger s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle li
96. Dos Nes 15 Key Sentry Immobilizer o ooooooooo 14 Lane Change And Turn Signals 108 Lap Shoulder BeltS o o o o o o o oooooo 36 Latches ica a ad 88 Hood aiia m RR e e RE E es 103 Lead Free Gasoline ooooooooooooooo ooo 297 Le ks Pltid cuotas a diga 88 Lite OPT ba Aah oi aoa e RU a A aia 287 Jalto at cues balla alg bea tein ao Gow ed las ed u 31 Light Bulbs i e ieee ee RERO 88 A a ealtvinte hos ial oe deme Lud 88 105 ATE Dag a qos Sea e ai 68 87 149 Antr Loek cemere eu bw EES epa s 261 Automatic Headlights 106 Brake Warning s i eus em e e Pen 150 Bulb Replacement llle 377 379 CUISE nas ir vesc ee Pd d dos 168 Daytime Running llle 107 Dimmer Switch Headlight 108 109 Engine Temperature Warning 152 EXtetlOr aia bone edd y a ebd e der bad 88 Hazard Warning Flasher o 310 Headlights i Regem e Ry eR ge 105 Headlights On Reminder 107 Headlights On With Wipers 106 114 Headlight Switch o oooo oo o ooo oo 105 High Bea aia a ad des 109 High Beam Low Beam Select 109 Illuminated Entry ooooooooooooooooo 19 Instrument Cluster oo oooooo oo o 105 Intensity Control ss i kd eme eedem me 110 Int riOE vec ce ear ee dane EES m entes 109 Lights On Reminder oooooooooooooo oo 107 412 INDEX IN L w Fuel uiia ia em
97. E Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light Green Telltale Light Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light O This light will turn on when the electronic speed control has been set What It Means White Telltale Indicator Light Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light White Telltale Light O Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light What It Means This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 Blue Telltale Indicator Light High Beam Indicator Light Blue Telltale Light What It Means High Beam Indicator Light This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on Push the multifunction control D lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to x switch the headlights back to low beam If the driver s door is open and the headlights or park lights are left on the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY DID This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pushing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The DID consists of the following e Tachometer e MPH KMH Vehicle Information Fuel Economy e Trip A e Trip B 0407149 Audio Driver Information Display DID e Stored Messages The Driver Information Displ
98. E i i g i i i 3 i JE i 3 H g i E 3 3 H i i p ied O o T ein E op E i i El 3 i E 8 i 2 eLecraome CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION HN WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owner s Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the top surface of the right hand side tunnel frame rail near the center of the vehicle the outboard facing surface of the right hand side B Pillar frame rail as well as the Automobile Information Disclo sure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title a INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death 0108008410 Vehicle Identification Number NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS
99. E RI T a is E UR S 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eee I nn 9 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee n n tn 89 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eee c rh 141 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 53 21 53 a RR EG ox be E eq a A 235 6 WHALE TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 9 a de ai eR Rec a ace oe de EUR ICA d eL CRURA RECAP da 309 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ss 4 3 x62 x e id ed ox e xd 9 Se oe Sag See RR e 331 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 545255964 9A e Be hed BEE a E ADAC CN RU ey SS ahs arena a OR oe 385 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE eee eee e re 393 En INDEX oa daa a a ia a UI alada 1 rade A d e 403 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION 000 4 M VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 6 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4 BM VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 7 E WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 6 4 INTRODUCTION HN INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workman ship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read thes
100. ESC TRACK RAIN MODE Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for further information Oil Pressure Low Fuel Low Service Antilock Brake System Service Electronic Throttle Control Cruise Off Cruise Ready Cruise Set To XXX MPH Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire Pressure Warnings Service Tire Pressure System Parking Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low Service Electronic Braking System Engine Temperature Hot Battery Voltage Low Brake Wear Service Electronic Throttle Control Lights On 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Right Turn Signal Light Out DID Selectable Menu Items Left Turn Signal Light Out Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until f the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the Turn Signal On DID e Service Air Bag System Tachometer e Service Air Bag Warning Light e Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow e button until the Tachometer icon is highlighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT arrow Front Seat Belts Unbuckled button to change the display between full tachometer or tachometer with digital speedometer e Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled e Door Open Doors Open e Park Brake Engaged MPH To km h KMH Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the MPH to km h icon is highlighted in the DID Push and release the OK but
101. ING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS Headlight Switch E The headlight switch is located on the left side of Headlight Switch e the instrument panel This switch controls the Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent operation of the headlights parking lights instru for parking light and instrument panel light operation ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming and Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for interior lights headlight parking light and instrument panel light op eration 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN Automatic Headlights This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after placing the ignition in the OFF position To turn the Automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active
102. ING YOUR VEHICLE 85 300 to 500 miles 483 to 805 km e Exercise the full engine rpm range shifting manually paddles or gear shift at higher rpms when possible Do not perform sustained operation with the accelera tor pedal at wide open throttle Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph 136 km h and observe local speed limits For the first 1500 mi 2414 km Do not participate in track events sport driving schools or similar activities during the first 1500 mi 2414 km NOTE Check engine oil with every refueling and add if necessary Oil and fuel consumption may be higher through the first oil change interval Running the engine with an oil level below the add mark can cause severe engine damage SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain car
103. Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win d to 0 F 18 C Starting the engine below 0 F dows other controls or move the vehicle Wand os k Starting 8 18 C coolant temperature creates a potential for Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 239 CAUTION Continued Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does gt not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal scuffing or seizing of internal components in this However if the engine has not started within three seconds slightly press the accelerator pedal while continuing to crank If the engine fails to start within high performance engine To prevent engine damage do not start the engine at temperatures below 0 F 18 C 15 seconds wait five seconds then repeat the Normal NOTE Starting procedure To Start The Engine Lm You must disarm the security system in order to start the engine Refer to Security Alarm System in 1 Fully apply the parking brake Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for gt press the clutch pedal to the floor further information NOTE The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor 3 Place the shift lever in NEUTRAL 240 STARTING AND OPERATING 4 Push the red ENGINE START STOP button located If Engine Fails To Start on the instrument panel Release the button when the engine starts CAUTION To prevent dama
104. LE IM WARNING Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment A low energy output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the dri
105. LR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to 2 recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its Can the head restraints be re No moved Can the buckle stalk be twisted to No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR re tractor rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the 9 click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat Tolock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retra
106. O ERO113955 13 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of Dealer NO 0019345 09 the battery is a minimum of three years with normal usage DOOR LOCKS 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB WARNING radios Do not touch the exhaust pipe sill covers when Gulf Coast Countries GCC entering or exiting your vehicle They can be hot enough to burn you Observe the warning labels on Key Fob each door closure panel Registered NO ER36613 15 When leaving the vehicle always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode re ib move the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the RFHUB vehicle Registered NO ER36600 15 Dealer NO DA36975 14 Continued 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II WARNING Continued When leaving the vehicle always cycle the ignition to the OFF mode lock and lock your vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured seriously or fatally Don t leave the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors
107. R Rx 255 Parking On Hill stesi eese 255 Passing Light ese xh iaces iR RR Re Cn 109 Pedals Adjustable cx es xp eps 115 lets ce ed oue ra Ge apse d s ein bes aE qs 83 414 INDEX IN Placard Tire And Loading Information 2 4 Rear Liftgate i 2 sese Sae ae mn nai 31 Power Rear Window Defroster o ooo ooooooooo ooo 140 Brakes soda a ia es 257 Rear Window Features o oooooooooooo oo 140 Door Locks escasea s mataas A ohare ee a 26 Reclining Front Seats ooooooooooooo oo 99 IMITTOLS 2004000 iaa eG 96 Recorder Event Data o o oooo o oo 71 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 132 Recreational Towing t Desair 306 Steering feta sade E ss 253 254 Reformulated Gasoline oo oooomoooo o 297 WiNdOWSie source ethan shag ered get 28 Refrigerants 23 picos tien dona 344 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts 43 Reminder Lights On oooooooooooo 107 Pretensioners Reminder Seat Belt ooo cee eae 35 beat Deli innata rr s dep e dr 43 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 23 FCC General Information o oooooooo o 24 Programming Additional Key Fobs 16 Radial Ply Tires ocio a je 281 Programming Additional Transmitters 16 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 352 Remote Battery Replacement 23 Radio Antenna 1 6 0 2 eee 206 T
108. Race Rp e ctn 98 Davie Ronnie e saaa teat a Power Seats 2 6 eens 100 E AS O Sats ders eR a 107 4 Non Adjustable Head Restraints 102 Multifunction Lever oooo o 108 Turn Signal su sciret toot oe ees itor 108 ll TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 103 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II High Low Beam Switch 10 B ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL 23440420008 117 Flash To Pass oooooooooooooo ooo o 109 To Actvale socorrista ee wets 118 Interior Lights 4 isse tatiana nuas 109 To Set A Desired Speed oas crsa ratan drga 119 ll WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 111 To Deactivate cerne an gigue ee 119 Intermittent Wiper System 111 To Resume Speed sis sees eh 119 Wiper Operation us 24 4 he RR retaso 112 To Vary The Speed Setting 119 Mist Feature oooooooooo ooo o 112 To Accelerate For Passing 121 Windshield Washers oooooooo 13 M PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF Headlights On With Wipers Available With EQUIPPED coca las tia 121 Automatic Headlights Only 114 M GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 123 B TILT STEERING COLUMN ser there 114 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 124 NW ADJUSTABLE PEDALS 00 cagas 115 Programming A Rolling Code 125 Adjustable Foo
109. TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ES CONTENTS ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 11 To Arm The System o oooooooooo oo 17 Keyless Push Button Ignition 11 To Disarm The System ooooomoooo o 18 Key Foios a oes oath ae ea ea 12 M ILLUMINATED ENTRY 19 Ignition Or Accessory On Message 13 M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE 20 M SENTRY KEY 0 00 00 eee eee 14 To Unlock The Doors isses 20 Replacement Keys o o o o ooo oo ooo ooo 15 To Lock The Doors oooccooccooocoo o 22 Customer Key Programming 16 To Unlatch The Liftgate o o oo 22 General Information o ooooooooooo o 16 Using The Panic Alarm oooomo oooo 22 ll VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM 17 H Programming Additional Transmitters 23 Rearming Of The SysteM o o o oo o 17 Transmitter Battery Replacement 23 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH General Information o oooooooooo o 24 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 46 E DOOR LOCKS socia ta nea 25 Child Restraints o oooooooooo o 72 Power Door Locks o ooooooooooo o 26 Transporting Pets comino 83 B WINDOWS 22a arar air OS os 28
110. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 404 INDEX IN About Your Brakes ese samia isas anaga ooo oo 257 ABS Anti Lock Brake SysteM 259 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 351 Adding F el mrss eai sita pb iio os 301 Adding Washer Fluid ver Eme 346 Additives Fuel o ooooooo o o 299 Adjustable Pedals 2i 4 4 2 6 4060 89 05404 mins 115 Alm Bat soto sobadod vw dod eed da 46 47 Advance Front Air Bag o oooo o 47 48 Air Bag Operation 0 0 00 0000 50 Air Bag Warning Light 68 Enhanced Accident Response 67 Event Data Recorder EDR o 71 Front Air Bae i oss ose ee ba wide ted 46 47 If A Deployment Occurs o ooo o o ooo ooo 66 Knee Impact Bolsters o o o o oooo 63 Maintaining Your Air Bag System 70 Transporting Pets 4 252 os ees 83 Air Bag Depl
111. WN arrow button until Oil Temperature is highlighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and the oil temperature will be displayed Engine Hours Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Engine Hours is highlighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and the engine hours will be displayed Intake Air Temp Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Intake Air Temp is highlighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and the intake air temperature will be displayed Current Torque Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Current Torque is highlighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and the current torque will be displayed Current Power Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Current Power is highlighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and the current power will be displayed Fuel Economy EN Range To Empty RTE Average Fuel Economy Miles Per Gallon MPG Bar graph Current Miles Per Gallon MPG Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy icon is high lighted and the following will display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 Trip A Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in the DID The Trip A information will display the following i tripA e Distance e Average Speed e E
112. Wi SRT ENGINE BREAK IN Power WiNdOWS 54245 ciE Pelei tiria 28 A O acida rada nid vs MEE ELT ERR 29 B SAFETY TIPS sus ceo ias sor x ea acea 85 AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection 30 APO a I Ae P SG QUE dad o Reset Ao Up AEE STETE 30 Exhaust GaSe 04s issue est ness toes eens 86 oa ee codos 31 A O A A et 33 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Important Safety Precautions 33 The Vehicle 3s e Sodas ne ao sd 88 Seat Belt Systems o o ooooo ooo ooo ooo 34 a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go ignition feature Keyless Push Button Ignition This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery START STOP
113. a 165 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 158 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 111 PARK usas Ec a Rap er SR AS dn 166 Passing ies dope ese ne oue BERR Ee 109 Seat Belt Reminder oooooooooomooo 148 security Alarm seer cei mac forged ee TuS eges 152 Service cto o ced 377 379 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 162 291 Turn Signal ecos pics pac 88 108 167 Vanity Mirror i isa eser y dea ta 97 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 152 167 Loading Vehicle Tires s icai uc dos aca odes sx aca eique RES asad 273 LOCKS sorier fleeseser ea a oar 25 Automatic Door oooooocococooooooo oo 27 Auto Unlock ecos cle ae io 28 DOOP ces zuo eed is ei a 25 Power OOP siria GR ES 26 Low Tire Indicator 0 0 0 0 cee eens 291 Low Tire Pressure System ooo o oooo ooo 291 Lubrication Body 924i 9 E RR 345 Lug Nuts ecese aaga ae acce ROS aa Rc sea 311 Maintenance Free Battery llle 341 Maintenance Procedures llle 337 Maintenance Schedule 385 386 388 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 158 334 Manual Service llle 400 Manual Transmission 241 358 Fluid Level Check 357 383 Lubricant Selection o oooooo ooo 383 Shift 5peeds rosa dig WS aioe dae Racers 244 Methanol 452r uk tata ea 298 Mirrors ize Ges d ex REI eee ae ad 92 Electric Remote o o ooooooo ooo 96 Outs
114. a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele phones Continued WARNING Continued The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning The capabilities of an Anti Lock Brake System ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type as the original equipment and the tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer STARTING AND OPERATING 261 WARNING Significant over or underinflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness Anti Lock Brake Warning Light The Anti Lock Brake Warning Light will turn ss on and stay on briefly as a bulb
115. ack of the RKE transmitter sideways of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage with your thumb and then pull the key out with your the seal during removal other hand 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 0213004940 e This device may not cause harmful interference Separating The RKE Transmitter Case 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery by the party responsible for compliance could void the clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the user s authority to operate the equipment This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal KIN distance check for these two conditions Registered N
116. adio refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED SD Card Slot AUX Jack And USB Port 1 SD Card Slot 2 AUX Jack 3 USB Port 0441069786 Located at the rear area of the center console this feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect Supple ment Manual STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 0450009993 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center Pushing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pushing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or other valid audio source The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left
117. aea a rea eie de 310 TOWING cd a a RO PER a npa e Ea 329 Emission Control System Maintenance 334 Engesa s bg dudes era is iia 333 Aur Cleaner seek Rex my SG a eS 340 Checking Oil Level ooooooooomoo 337 Compartment ierse nes lille 333 Coolant Antifreeze o oo ooooo 349 381 COGE unis icr hue AS sce RR Rp Bal 349 Exhaust Gas Caution 86 301 Fails To att iioes esee amete 240 Flooded Starting llle 240 Fuel Requirements oooooooooo o 297 380 OU e diee ev eco epe b ada 337 380 381 Oil Change Interval ce E Rem 338 Oil Filler Cap c 23 43 2s reto actes eer es 339 Oil Filter 2t eee des DECADES Te 339 Oil Selection cores ie o da 338 380 Overh aUne iis ces iia dios Rane da 310 Engine Oil Viscosity oo oooooo o 339 380 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 67 Ethanol abre idas ao da 298 Event Data Recorder oo ooo 71 Exhaust Gas Caution 86 301 Exhaust System o earten aceae giesa eee 86 346 Exterior Lighting Vacio tid ees 105 Exterior Lights s s cesser ik raa 88 Filters Ait Cleaner siii ade e e A 340 Engine Oil scr eee cee eee ee ses 339 381 Engine Oil Disposal o ooooommoooo o 339 Flashers Hazard Warning eseigi e anni e agin acetate 310 a INDEX 409 Turri Signal ocio Pie aie tae eS 88 108 167 Flash To Pass 1 0 eee eee eee 109 Flooded Engine Starting o ooooooooo
118. afety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled to ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Periodic Safety Che
119. ain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicles OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manual
120. airable e The puncture is no greater than a Y of an inch 6 mm Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Symbol Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons Spring Summer Fall and Winter Traction levels may vary between different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40 F 5 C or if roads are covered with ice or snow For more informa tion contact an authorized dealer A STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use Summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely aff
121. ake pedal can result in abnormally Continued WARNING Continued high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser voir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only the manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking WARNING Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type o
122. and correct cold tire inflation pressures The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicator Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle A STARTING AND OPERATING 289 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle
123. and federal fire regula tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling NOTE A funnel is provided located in the trunk in the spare tire area to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can STARTING AND OPERATING 303 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release procedure by following the proceeding steps 1 Open the liftgate 2 Locate the carpet access door on the right side inner trim panel of the trunk Carpet Access Door 304 STARTING AND OPERATING 3 Pull the edge of the access door on the right side inner 4 Pull the release cable to release the fuel door trim panel to expose the emergency release cable Release Cable Edge Of Access Door STARTING AND OPERATING 305 0568008397 0568008398 Fuel Door Open Carpet Into Original Position 5 Return the release cable to the original position inside the inner trim panel and push the carpet back into the original position 306 STARTING AND OPERATING HN TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Whe
124. and you can be pros ecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 732 8243 e Canadian residents should refer to Transport Cana da s website for additional information www tc gc ca eng motorvehiclesafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reache
125. anufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage FCA US LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 855 SRT TEAM FCA Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 397 In Mexico Contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may
126. as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi cle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 054901778 Example Tire Placard Location Door 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF qu anos AE SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR TIRE FRONT SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE PI9570R14 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIR SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire And Loading Informa
127. at is different from the occu pant s properly seated weight input This may result in serious injury or death in a collision Always wear your seat belt and sit properly with the seatback in an upright position your back against the seatback sitting upright facing for ward in the center of the seat with your feet comfortably on or near the floor Do not carry or hold any objects e g backpacks boxes etc while seated in the front passenger seat Holding an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different than the occupant s prop erly seated weight input which may result in serious injury or death in a collision 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI The Occupant Classification System OCS consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Occupant Classification Module OCM and Sensor located in the front passenger seat Passenger Air Bag Disabled PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel show icon e Air Bag Warning Light Occupant Classification Module OCM And Sensor The Occupant Classification Module OCM is located underneath the front passenger seat The Sensor is lo cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front pas senger s most probable classification The OCM commu nicates this information to th
128. ate release button while pulling up on the trunk hatch to open Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off push and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 0202003287 Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back Emergency Key Removal housing or the printed circuit board 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves latch on the b
129. ation Wiper Blades ooooooocoooo ooo Adding Washer Fluid 346 Exhaust System so seget raat dieses man oo 346 Cooling System 0 0000000 349 O Brake System o o oo ooooooooooo ooo 355 Manual Transmission 357 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Hydraulic Clutch oooooooooooo 358 Rear AXIS caprina s RES 358 Appearance Care And Protection From COZ OSIORl 22er ee 44 X E RR ag 359 Ba FUSES serie eden ER RR TREES 366 Power Distribution Center 367 WM VEHICLE STORAGE 00 374 E REPLACEMENT BULBS 377 E BULB REPLACEMENT 379 Front Headlamp Front Park Turn Signal LAMB alae MASE UP esie ae 379 Front Rear Side Marker Lamp 379 Taillamp Tail Stop Lamp 379 Rear Turn Signal Lamp 379 Backup Lamps 00000000 ca eee 379 E FLUID CAPACITIES iac doce fex RR 380 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS enseres aa 381 EGINE oo ce iege y AR a 381 CHASSIS sessies ed ox RAYS REG E 383 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 8 4L s s O mmm 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Brake Clutch Fluid Reservoir 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 7 Engine Oil Fill 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 4 Power Distribut
130. ay DID features a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster Performance e Screen Setup e Diagnostics UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 Hibernation UP Arrow Button The system allows the driver to select information by A Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering upward through the main menu and sub wheel menus Fuel Economy Trip A Trip B Audio Stored Messages Screen Set Up e DOWN Arrow Button Push and release the DOWN arrow button to V scroll downward through the main menu and submenus Fuel Economy Trip A Trip B Au dio Stored Messages Screen Set Up 040971549 DID Steering Wheels Controls 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e RIGHT Arrow Button DID Display Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to gt access select the information screens or sub menu screens of a main menu item Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to reset displayed selected features that can be reset e LEFT Arrow Button Push and release the LEFT arrow button to lt q return to the main menu from an info screen or submenu item NOTE Pushing any arrow will override the DID pop up messages and return you to the menu screen 041072521 DID Display A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 The DID display is located in the center portion of the instrument cluster and consists of the
131. bon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area e If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Continued WARNING Continued e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 S
132. bstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually e If the window detects an obstacle 10 times in a row the auto up feature unlearns WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Reset Auto Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window may need to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Make sure the door is fully closed 2 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 3 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open LIFTGATE The liftgate can be unlocked or locked by the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter the manual lock cylin der located on the rear panel or by activating either of the power door lock switches located on the door trim panels v 021871494 Rear Panel Manual Lock Cylinder To unlock the liftgate with the RKE transmitter push the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter two times
133. can be used either rear facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rear facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rear facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IN remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for WARNING Continued as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint A
134. cks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for proper closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected The cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B MIRRORS 1 2 ee 92 B LIGHTS 2 8 R REB RS 105 Automatic Dimming Mirror 92 Headlight Switch o 105 Outside Mirrors ooooooooooo o o 96 Automatic Headlights 106 Power Mirrors 124239 Re EX ERROR ae ae ad 96 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Vanity Mirror 2 cece eee eevee ees 97 a e een teeka gee H6 ll SENS ooo Mtra Sres RES 98 o sereante ien n Manual Seats ice dos eo
135. cle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free you can use your voice to send a text message Messages are limited to 140 characters The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be illuminated to use the feature Yelp 8 4A 8 4AN Once registered with Uconnect Access you can use your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you 1 Press the Apps button on the touchscreen 2 Press the Yelp button on the touchscreen 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch screen push the VR button Avr then say YELP search 4 Listen to the system prompts and after the beep tell Uconnect the place or business that you d like Uconnect to find TIP Once you perform a search you can reorganize the results by selecting either the Best Match Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display tm FM 87 7 12 35 yap gt Current Location Shopping Drugstores C E IL NA o fal Radio Media Controls 030707799 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 SiriusXM Travel Link 8 4AN Need to find a gas station view local movie listings check a sports score or the 5 day weather forecast SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8 4AN system Push the VR button vr After the beep say one of the following commands e Show fuel prices e Show 5 day weather
136. conditions i e during pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in light brake applications unpredictable braking action longer stopping dis The brakes on your new vehicle do not require a long tances or brake damage break in period However you should avoid repeated When descending mountains or hills repeated hard brake applications from high speeds during initial braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking break in In addition you should avoid severe brake control Avoid repeated heavy braking by down loading such as may be encountered when descending shifting the transmission whenever possible long mountain grades Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 259 WARNING Continued Do not drive too fast for road conditions especially when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can build up between the tire tread and the road This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking ability and control e After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS and Elec tronic Stability Control ESC All of these systems work together to en
137. ctor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 7 There is a tether strap anchor located behind i the child tether access cover behind the passen WARNING ger seat To attach a child restraint tether strap to the anchor Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage Do not attach a tether strap for a rear facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat including the 1 Move the seat forward seat frame or a tether anchorage Only attach the tether strap of a rear facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position 3 Remove the child tether access cover by prying either located behind the top of the vehicle seat See the side with a screwdriver or
138. d be repeated After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up MANUAL TRANSMISSION NOTE The parking brake should be engaged and the shift lever placed into REVERSE before leaving the vehicle especially when parked on an incline Your vehicle is equipped with a high torque capacity dual disc clutch The clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the floor during each shift As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal 242 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch e Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor may cause increased shift efforts and may result in damage to the clutch and transmission Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while driving as this may result in transmission damage Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear wheels are spinning due to loss of traction Dam age to the transmission may occur Ensure the transmission is in first gear when moving forward from a standing position CAUTION Failure to start out in first gear when moving forward from a starting position may result in damage to the clutch Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the accelerator pedal before shifting gears A
139. d a secondary seat cover or mat a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 e At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by FCA US LLC WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat assembly its related components seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS and or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards CMVSS Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger and position the front occu pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags WARNING Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Door Integrated Side Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Door Integrated Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front seat occupants in certain side impacts in 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE ST
140. d into the vehi cle s electrical system Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle s electrical sys tem This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call To avoid inter ference that can cause the 9 1 1 Call system to fail never add aftermarket equipment e g two way mobile radio CB radio data recorder etc to your Continued WARNING Continued vehicle s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT THE UCONNECT FEATURES APPS AND SERVICES AMONG OTHERS WILL NOT OPERATE Modifications to any part of the 9 1 1 Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ma Outside Mirrors Power Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver side to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight door trim panel overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lan
141. d system does not need to be armed or activated Operation vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked cause serious injury or death or unlocked The system uses a Key Fob with a factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 CAUTION Do not make modifications or alterations to the immobilizer system Modifications or alterations to the immobilization system may result in a loss of programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank with an invalid Key Fob After placing the ignition to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the system In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone tried to use an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the system Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon
142. d the height or weight limits of their child re straint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve hicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Two types of child restraints can be used rear facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rear facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats
143. damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to be come inoperable After using an aftermarket tire Continued CAUTION Continued sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPMS sensor NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure 294 STARTING AND OPERATING HI Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes w
144. ded period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine 2 Open the fuel filler door running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into WOTE i genau OS e prevent Ne the vehicle fuel door from opening If this occurs lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re release the fuel Continued door using the inside release button Do not pry on the door time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open 1 Push the fuel filler door release switch located in the driver s door map pocket 302 STARTING AND OPERATING HN 3 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the CAUTION pipe seals the system To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top i i he filler pipe th 4 Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the off Mhe fuel tank after filling nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel ing WARNING NOTE Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the 5 Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle i tie tre ee e orike tank ig l n 1 f ll SERES OU GHD OU TUS duel Han dedu Never add fuel when the engine is running This is 6 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door in violation of most state
145. e 284 285 Spark Plugs eben be ded da as 381 Speed Control Cruise Control 117 DEI acre ur Pa ica yep CP Geh aces Eddie dos 238 Emergency Jump Starting 323 Engine Fails To Start ooooooomooooo 240 Starting And Operating 0050 238 Starting Procedures oscena less 238 Steering Column Controls ooocooooo oo oo 108 PoWer 6 003s Guin er by uev er ees 253 254 Tilt Column eoe a e 114 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 204 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 204 STOA E ais gd xoa d oen ue d aede 374 Storage Vehicle sss eus ae cae ee 213 Stuck Ereeing x esee x edere ES ep eh oe 327 a INDEX 417 Supplemental Restraint System Air Bag 47 Tilt Steering Column eii Rr daa 114 Time Delay Headlight oooooo oo 106 Tire And Loading Information Placard 273 274 Tire Marking s r adda a athe eps d pacis 266 THOS 3 20a a oa eS 88 278 401 Aging Life Of Tires 000 287 Ait Pressure ces ace xe e dea a 278 Chain ios pce E eee surp d ee eG 290 Compact Spare pranie uaau 284 General Information ooooooooomooo 278 High Speed aiii es 281 Inflation Pressures oooooooooommooo 279 Lite Of GS charros ened dae 287 Load Capacity 6 0 0 cee eee 273 274 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 291 Pressure Warning Light s cei ee taiest i essais 162 Quality Grading
146. e ORC The ORC uses the classification to determine whether it should activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag In order for the OCS to operate as designed it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and prop erly wearing the seat belt Properly seated passengers are e Sitting upright Facing forward e Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort ably on or near the floor a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 e Sitting with their back against the seat back and the The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passen seat back in an upright position ger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very DEN light objects in it The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear facing child restraint The front passenger seat is occupied by a child including a child seated in a forward facing child restraint or booster seat The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas senger including a child or small adult The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time Seated Properly 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Passenger Air Bag Disable PAD System Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passen ger Advanced Air Bag Dis abled Indicator Light PAD Status Front Passenger Air Bag Status Front Passe
147. e first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons e If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for information or assistance a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 0000 Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Place the ignition in the ON RUN position 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand held transmitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid At the garage door opener moto
148. e next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside E mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle Power Mirror Controls seen in the passenger side mirror 03140401 3j a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror push either the L left or R right to select the mirror that you want to adjust NOTE A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted Using the mirror control switch push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move Vanity Mirror 030471338 A vanity mirror is on the passenger side sun visor To use Vanity Mirror the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME SEATS Manual Seats Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Forward And Rearward Adjustment vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow p
149. e of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Driver And Passenger BeltAlert If Equipped 2 BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert to buckle their seat belts The Belt Alert feature is active when ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON RUN position an intermit tent chime will signal for a few seconds If the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buck led The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccu pied BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un buckled if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on u
150. e publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction DODGE is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 Cd 10 loba i ED e I ELECTRONIC STABILITY ii E p E i i i i du E A O T i amp i i x s Di i i f 3 i i E A Dp iw ES Ne O t 8 2 i f i 1910 cS H D ie lala la im TI i i E E i i i i i i i i i HEATED i I q EI Ju IS de 19 t jor Es gt TEM ique B ub
151. e system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the DID will change color back to the original color and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the Driver Information Display DID will display a SER VICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 296 STARTING AND OPERATING HN 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using
152. e than 10 ethanol E 10 Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 ethanol E 10 Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 10 ethanol E 10 or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non Flex Fuel Vehicles FFV are compatible with gaso line containing up to 10 ethanol E 10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim ited Warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms Operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on Poor engine performance e Poor cold start and cold drivability e Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion A STARTING AND OPERATING 299 MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended
153. e to slow down an impending overheat condition a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311 e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS system adds heat to the engine cooling system and P I I i i runing the A C off con help temave this heal roper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the heat the mode control to floor and the blower control vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a to high This allows the heater core to act as a properly calibrated torque wrench supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut e WARNING Bolt Size Bolt Socket Size Torque Specifications You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If 107 Ft Lbs 145 N m 1 2 x 20 19 mm you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosio
154. eady Do Not Disturb phonebook recent calls messaging of Liste g Say a c D R U 0 r4 m o ID d Media Phone Apps Settings nman EM r s Help or Canc ings CA Radio 0307077986 Manager Climate Uconnect 8 4AN Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM EM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear Subscrip tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required Push the VR button vr After the beep say Tune to ninety five point five FM e Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 TIP At any time if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command push the VR button VR and say Help The system will provide you with a list of commands 5 6 105 1 107 9 Classic Rock 94 7 HD 12 WCSX FM 94 7 WCSX Detroits FM w sm browse vot Tuning M J T Media Phone O Roe Settings 0307077987 Uconnect 8 4AN Radio A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Media Uconnect offers connections via USB SD Bluetooth and auxiliary ports If Equipped Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles Push the VR button vr After the beep say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist e Change source to Bluetooth e Change source to iPod e Change source to USB e Play artist Beethoven Play album Gr
155. eatest Hits Play song Moonlight Sonata Play genre Classical TIP Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod or USB device Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist album song and genre information is displayed repeat shuffle lt B t Beatro Good Vibes Beatropolis m browse wet Playing LI Phone Manager Apps Settings Climate Uconnect 8 4AN Media 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Phone Making and answering hands free phone calls is easy with Uconnect When the Phonebook button is illumi nated on your touchscreen your system is ready Check UconnectPhone com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions Push the Phone button e After the beep say one of the following commands e Call John Smith e Dial 123 456 7890 and follow the system prompts e Redial call previous outgoing phone number e Call back call previous incoming phone number TIP When providing a Voice Command push the Phone button Ne and say Call then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book When a contact has multiple phone numbers you can say Call John Smith work UconnectPhone Redial Phone Ready phoneboo et Listenir dd O Phone Manager nt calls messaging settings Apps m G4 MA A Radio 0307077990 Media Settings Climate Uconnect 8 4AN Phone A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
156. ect the safety and handling of your vehicle WARNING Do not use Summer tires in snow ice conditions You could lose vehicle control resulting in severe injury or death Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control Snow Tires There are no snow tires that are compatible with the wheels on this vehicle Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor mation Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire please refer to Tire Service Kit in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 284 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result
157. ectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start
158. ed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information See your authorized dealer for service Manual Transmission Transmission Fluid Level Check Check the fluid in the transmission when performing other underbody services Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug located on the left side of the transmission The fluid level should be approximately 1 4 in 6 4 mm below the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE DO NOT overfill transmission damage can occur 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or damage to the transmission Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifica tions Change Transmission Fluid Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals If contaminated with water change the fluid immediately See your authorized dealer for service Hydraulic Clutch Master Cylinder Clutch Fluid Level Check The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir In the event of leakage or wear use only the manufacturer s recommended brake f
159. either forward or backward and rotate it upward or downward as desired 4 Tighten the nut being careful not to over tighten it ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel Adjustable Foot Rest 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN Sesc V ON OFF CANCEL 032173331 Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 ON OFF 4 CANCEL 2 RES 3 SET NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control buttons are pushed at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button to activate the Electronic Speed Control The Cruise Indicator Light in the Driver Infor mation Display DID will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faste
160. els On The Ground Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Manual Transmission Flat Tow None NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED Rear NOT RECOMMENDED On Trailer All OK NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four CAUTION wheels are off the ground Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A STARTING AND OPERATING 307 GROUND CLEARANCE The front and rear fascias and side sills ride low and ground clearance is limited CAUTION Damage to the front and rear fascias and side sills can occur if you disregard the low ground clearance in these areas of your vehicle Pay close attention when parking to avoid running into parking curbs Exer cise caution when entering or exiting steep drive ways or when pulling off the road onto soft shoul ders WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS E HAZARD WARNING FLASHER 310 Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions 315 E IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 310 Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit 317 ll WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE E JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 323 SPECIFICATIONS 0 2000002 311 E FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE Torque Specifications oooooooo oo 311 E TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 329 M TIRE SERVICE KIT
161. elt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Pulling Out The Latch Plate jj j 8226009900 y lj 9226009902 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 3 When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the latch 4 Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low plate into the buckle until you hear a click across your hips below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the Positioning The Lap Belt Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal if any slack so that it is comfort able and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed anchor point At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begin
162. ement when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated e Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition A STARTING AND OPERATING 281 WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi
163. emove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the wiper blade out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use Poor perfor mance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not engine coolant anti freeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution
164. ended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery The HomeLink buttons located on the sunvisor desig nate the three different HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM 0415052475 HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE e Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for th
165. ent see your authorized dealer Front Rear Side Marker Lamp For bulb replacement see your authorized dealer Taillamp Tail Stop Lamp For bulb replacement see your authorized dealer Rear Turn Signal Lamp For bulb replacement see your authorized dealer Backup Lamps For bulb replacement see your authorized dealer 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE INN FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 16 Gallons 60 6 Liters Engine Oil With Filter We recommend you use synthetic SAE 0W 40 API Certified 11 Quarts 10 4 Liters Transmission We recommend you use MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans 3 4 Quarts 3 2 Liters mission Fluid Rear Axle We recommend you use Castrol SAF XJ SAE 75W 140 Syn 1 5 Quarts 1 4 Liters thetic Gear and Axle Lubricant Cooling System We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 16 Quarts 15 Liters OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 Engine Oil We recommend you use a full synthetic 0W 40 engine oil such as MOPAR or Pennzoil Ultra or equivalent engine oil Engine Oil Filter We
166. eople to ride in any area of your m vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are Seat Adjustment Bar more likely to be seriously injured or killed The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear using a seat belt properly ward Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched 030971472 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Seat Height Adjustment f 030971471 Height Adjustment Lever The seat height adjustment lever is located on the out board side of the seat Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat height Recliner Adjustment p Recline Lever 030971470 The recliner lever is located on the outboard side of the seat To recline the seat lean forward slightly pull the recliner lever upward lean backward until the seat is in the desired position and release the lever To return the 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM seat to its full upright position lean forward pull the Power Seats recliner lever upward and hold it until the seat returns to is fall apao postion On models equipped with power seats the power seat
167. er drain on the vehicle s battery If the vehicle is not going to be driven in the next three weeks perform the battery recharge procedure in the Service Manual 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Use care when disconnecting the remote positive cable It is connected to the battery and can short out to any metal on the vehicle Always tape or wrap the exposed cable end to prevent electrical shorts Check the battery every four to six weeks to ensure that the voltage is above 12 10 Volts The voltage will drop more rapidly in hot temperatures If battery voltage drops below 12 10 Volts follow the battery recharge procedure in the Service Manual NOTE To help prevent the battery from discharging during shorter periods of inactivity perform the follow ing 1 Make sure that the liftgate hood doors windows are completely closed 2 Make sure that Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter is operating and that the battery is good 3 Make sure that the HOOD LIFTGATE and DOOR switches are in adjustment Perform the quick system check which follows Use the remote transmitter to set the alarm If the alarm SET light comes on and flashes the system is operating properly If not there is a problem with a switch or the system See your authorized dealer for service If you plan to store the vehicle longer than 30 days we recommend using Hibernation Mode to conserve bat tery power Refer to Hibernation Mode
168. er of reasons A child or others could be system will still function However there will injured seriously or fatally Do not leave the key be some loss of overall braking effectiveness You may fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible notice increased pedal travel during application greater E to children and do not leave the ignition of a pedal force required to slow or stop and potential vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the activation of the Brake System Warning Light ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the ve In the event power assist is lost for any reason ie hicle repeated brake applications with the engine off the Ensure the parking brake is fully disengaged be brakes will still function However the effort required to fore driving Failure to do so can lead to brake brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required failure and an accident with the power system operating 258 STARTING AND OPERATING IN Brake Pad Break In Safe Operating Tips a Rae E mance braking system The brake pads are a semi aaa metallic compound which offer superior fade resistance To use your brakes and accelerator more safely for consistent operation A compromise to using this type follow these tips of brake pad is that the brakes may squeal slightly under e Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the certain weather and operating
169. erator pedal to deactivate launch con trol Pushing the launch control button or actuating the brakes will also deactivate launch control NOTE limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be e Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum launch RPM and waits for the driver to release the clutch Launch Mode then uses engine throttle only to achieve controlled wheelslip for maximum acceleration through first gear exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents A STARTING AND OPERATING 249 TRACK USE e Tire pressure Guidelines For Track Use 35psi hot recommended This typically can be achieved with cold pressures between 25 and 29 psi NOTE Because of the extreme conditions encountered depending on driver track and ambient conditions during track use any damage or wear associated with track use is not covered by warranty Conclusion OF Hach Track Event e It is recommended that a brake bleed procedure is performed to maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of your brake system e It is recommended that the shocks be operated in RACE mode if equipped ESC i k le in all ee a eee e It is recommended that each track outing should end Prior To Each Track Event Day with a minimum of 1 cool down lap using minimal e Verify all flu
170. erly with the seatback in an upright position your back against the seatback sitting upright facing for ward in the center of the seat with your feet comfortably on or near the floor The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the air bag system If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on or stays on after you start the vehicle or it comes on as you drive take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru Do not carry or hold any objects e g backpacks boxes etc while seated in the front passenger seat Holding an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different than the occupant s prop erly seated weight input which may result in serious injury or death in a collision ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Continued 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IN WARNING Continued seated weight of a front seat passenger the OCS compo nents must function as designed Do not make any Placing an object on the fl
171. es ENGINE Keyless Push Button Ignition 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand NOTE In the event that the FOB does not start the vehicle FOB not Found message use the FOB nose furthest point from key ring and push the start button FOB replaces the finger 0202006716 Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter x5 RKE Liftgate Button v RKE Door Unlock Button RKE Door Lock Button pane RKE PANIC Alarm Button THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE With the Uconnect system the power window switches radio and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information WARNING When leaving the vehicle always make sure the
172. estarted The RACE setting will provide a much firmer ride When RACE mode is enabled a Shock symbol with RACE next to it will light up in the instrument cluster STARTING AND OPERATING 247 LAUNCH MODE e A This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight line racing 1 Bring the vehicle to complete stop on a level track surface with the engine running 2 Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving 3 Fully depress the clutch and select the first gear position 4 Push and release the LAUNCH button located on T 058372615 the steering wheel controls LAUNCH Button 5 Rapidly press the accelerator pedal to the floor within one second 248 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NOTE If the cluster launch DID message indicates all conditions are correct for launch and the throttle is pressed to the floor quickly within approximately 1 2 second the system will hold the engine speed to a preset speed below the engine rev limiter speed e Launch Mode can be used in any of the Electronic Stability Control ESC Modes e Launch Mode should not be used within the first 500 miles 805 km of engine break in WARNING Launch Mode is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be used on any public roadways It is recommended that this feature be used in a controlled environment and within the 6 Release the clutch aggressively Do not ride the clutch Release the accel
173. ext message is not compatible with iP hones e Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP Aaa UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 General Information NOTE This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex two conditions pressly approved by the party responsible for compli 1 This device may not cause harmful interference e uL I vice 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met Gulf Coast Countries GCC Bluetooth TRA Register No ER0095499 12 Dealer No 0028019 10 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Additional Information Ucomnect System Support 2015 FCA US LLC All rights reserved Mopar and e U S residents call 877 855 8400 or visit Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner DriveUconnect com Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC Android is a ee Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English or 800 trademark of Google Inc SiriusXM ll rel ks 5 geet Ob Oe UK UE LEE TCU nas 387 9983 French or visit DriveUconnect ca and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc Yelp
174. ey are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the seat belt retractor process that generates the non toxic gas used for air assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer e bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the diately Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye System serviced as well irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in but they will open during air bag deployment structions for cleaning NOTE e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de authorized dealer immediately ployed If you are involved in another collision the air Enhanced Accident Response System bags will not be in place to protect you In the event of an impact i
175. f a collision This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR The seat belt in the passenger seating position is equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR which is used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section of this manual The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position 0226039335 e ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click In Automatic Locking Mode the shoulder belt is auto matically pre locked The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position
176. f brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its perfor mance The proper type of brake fluid for your Continued WARNING Continued vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 WARNING Continued Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident Change Brake Fluid Brake fluid will tend to absorb moisture from the atmo sphere over time If the fluid becomes contaminated with water brake performance will deteriorate Therefore the brake fluid must be changed at the intervals specifi
177. f the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys tem perform the following functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pressed The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power Unlock the power door locks Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON RUN to ignition OFF Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine Air Bag Warning Light The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Occupant Restraint Control o ler ORC monitors the internal circuits and N interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in
178. ff highway or off road use only and should not be done on any public roadways It is recommended that these features be 0 60 Time used in a controlled environment and within the Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as until the last 0 60 MPH information is displayed measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which Braking Distance Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button until the last Braking Distance information is displayed Continued 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 4 Mile Elapsed Time Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button until the last 1 4 Mile Top Speed amp Duration information is displayed 1 8 Mile Elapsed Time Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button until the last 1 8 Mile Top Speed amp Duration information is displayed G Force Instant Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button until the Current G Forces are displayed G Force Peak Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button until the Peak G Forces are displayed Diagnostic Codes Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Diagnostic Code icon is high lighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to display any present diagnostic trouble codes along with a brief definition Vehicle Hibernation 3 Push the RIGHT arrow button on the steering wheel
179. flated Tire Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Service Kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pushing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn Off the Tire Service Kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Push the Power Button 4 to turn On the Tire Service Kit Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if available Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing thro
180. following sections 1 Main Screen The inner ring of the display will illuminate in grey under normal conditions yellow for non critical warnings red for critical warnings and white for on demand information 2 Audio Phone Information and Sub menu Informa tion Whenever there are sub menus available the position within the sub menus is shown here 3 Reconfigurable Telltales Information 4 Telltales Indicators 5 Selectable Information Tach Mph Kmh Vehicle Info Fuel Economy Trip A Trip B Audio Stored Messages Screen Setup Performance Diagnostics Hibernation 6 Suspension Status The suspension status icon will illuminate in this area Refer to Starting And Operat ing for further information 7 ESC Status The ESC status icon will illuminate in this area Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for further information 8 Launch Control status when launch control mode is entered Refer to Launch Mode in Starting And Operating for further information 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appr
181. from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS minus minus Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 lbs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 277 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 278 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions e Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION e Overinflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve satisfactory operation of your vehicle Four primary areas hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in are affected by improper tire pressure loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Tire Pressure e Safety a
182. g a Tire with Tire Service Kit section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement e When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1 4 inch 6 mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses 316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 inch 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewal
183. ge to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it Engine START STOP Button started Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 241 WARNING Continued and damage the converter and vehicle If the ve hicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergencies for further informa tion If the engine is flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the ENGINE START button is released If this occurs continue crank ing up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the ENGINE START button once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure shoul
184. h slowly until the vehicle is disarmed Engine Temperature Warning Light Red Warning Light What It Means Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition As engine coolant temperatures rise and E the gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is expired whichever come first A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 Red Warning Light What It Means If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the tem perature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for ser vice Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further infor mation Charging System Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s nonessential electri cal devices or increase engi
185. h the back button on the faceplate e Headlights With Wipers When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press the Headlights With Wipers button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Daytime Running Lights When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the vehicle is set in motion To make your selection press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Flash Lights With Lock When this feature is selected the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press the Flash Lights with Lock button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selec
186. hance vehicle stability and control in vari ous driving conditions Anti Lock Brake System The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sen sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the ABS is functioning 260 STARTING AND OPERATING HN The ABS conducts a low speed self test at approximately WARNING 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the STI brake pedal while this test is occurring you may feel a e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS contains so slight pedal movement The movement can be more phisticated electronic equipment that may be sus apparent on ice and snow and be considered normal ceptible to interference caused by improperly in stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of The ABS pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to
187. here are seven the heating elements blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause e Use care when washing the inside of the rear automatic mode to switch to manual operation The window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on Speeds can be selected using either the buttons on the the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen as follows and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the Button On The Faceplate heating elements Labels can be peeled off after The blower speed increases as you turn the control soaking with warm water clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower Conia speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Button On The Touchscreen Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 8 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows e Panel Mode J Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individu ally adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflo
188. hes will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in Auto Down Feature formation Both power window switches have an AUTO down M e window will go down automatically y ARNO release and the window will go down automatically Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do To open the window part way push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop not let children play with power windows Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the To stop the window from going all the way down during Continued the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the o
189. hing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pushing the RES button once will result in a 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km h e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Decrease Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can de crease speed by pushing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Metric Speed km h e Pushing the SET button once will result ina 1 km
190. ide e arnet aarti NOE es ewe ee 96 ReatsvieW a 2 8 sae Gee wld Se dak aa Ed 92 A INDEX 413 bu DEDERIT 97 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System o o o o o o o 291 MOPAR Parts 5 eun eed eerie e e A 336 399 MTBE ETBE ever adi VES s 298 Multi Function Control Lever 108 Occupant Restraints o o o o oo ooo oooooo 33 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 297 Oil Engine i522 ek dy enm is 337 380 381 Capacity wi esenue doctor Teens 380 Change Interval oooooooooooooooooo 338 Checking ssa essct ra em Rand 337 Dipstick vic ica el gae m rs 337 Disposal ses es atea ness 339 Filtros eR R4 t e daa 339 381 Filter Disposal es RR Rn 339 Materials Added To 2 0 0 00 eee o 339 Pressure Warning Light 154 Recommendation sees 338 380 VISCOSITY iu baila tend dta ERE eli 339 380 Oil Filter Change ece 4s ovre a e 204 339 Oil Filter Selection o ooooooooooo o 339 Oil Pressure Lights aes ta pa ed 154 Onboard Diagnostic SysteM ooooomoooo oo 334 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 123 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview MirrOtS o oooooooo ooo 96 Overheating Engine 0 0 06 cee ee ooo 310 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 400 Paint Cate ono a ed 359 Panic Alarm cesi ce atn a 22 Parking Brake iu be AR R
191. ids are at the correct levels Refer to Fluid braking Capacities in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further Following each track session tires should be inspected information for wear e Verify the front and rear brake pads have more than pad thickness remaining If the brake pads require changing please burnish prior to track outing at full pace 250 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NOTE DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES e All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of Acceleration endurance however it is recommended that suspen sion system brake system prop shaft and Y shaft WARNING boots should be checked for wear or damage after every track event Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly e Track usage results in increased operating tempera have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully tures of the engine transmission clutch driveline and whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice brake system This may affect noise NVH counter snow wet mud loose sand etc measures designed into your vehicle New compo nents may need to be installed to return the system to the original NVH performance For ACR models please review the supplemental manual for track tips A STARTING AND OPERATING 251 Traction 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a vi
192. ility offered by the ESC system is greatly reduced Track Mode is intended for off highway or off road only Track Mode has no traction control and has reduced stability control To enter the Track Mode mode push the ESC switch twice The ESC OFF telltale will 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Rain Mode Rain mode offers increased traction control and stability control for low traction conditions such as wet roads dry roads during cold temperatures or when the driver wants enhanced stability due to lack of familiarity or experience with the vehicle s response To enter the Rain Mode mode push the ESC switch three times The ESC Rain Light will illuminate and the ESC RAIN message will display in the vehicle cluster left of the odometer Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Some models may not offer Sport or Track Mode TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Standards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades a STARTING AND OPERATING 267 NOTE e e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215
193. ility for passengers An improperly latched seatback could cause serious injury UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Pull the hood release lever rearward to release the 1 Reach into the back side area of the drivers front Mogt latches fender to gain access to the hood release lever 031371332 031371331 Hood Release Lever Hood Release Lever Location 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM CAUTION Do not leave the hood open in areas where strong gust of wind are likely Such a place might be by the side of the road where large trucks pass by Strong gusts of wind may damage the hood Al ways close the hood in such situations To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood 3 Lift the hood upward to the full forward position to close it Simply lower the hood until it is open approximately 18 in 46 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches If both latches did not secure a slight push effort in the same area used for opening the hood front of wiper arm needs to Opened Hood be applied to secure the latches Never drive the NOTE The recommended lift point is to place the lifting vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both hand forward of one of the wiper arms and pull up The latches engaged assist props will help raise and hold the hood to a normal usage position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 WARN
194. ill affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module It is particularly impor tant for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pres sure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Driver Information Display DID e TPM Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 6 The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Driver Information Display DID will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic A STARTING AND OPERATING 295 showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values changing color An Inflate to XX mes sage will also be displayed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those in a different color in the DID graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the Inflate to XX message Once th
195. illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replaceme
196. immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator coolant pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate
197. in very cold weather To clear the windows select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed Do not use the Recirculation mode without A C for long periods as fogging may occur NOTE Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will au tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occurs recirculation will be unavailable Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow can cause odor and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months ensure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MN Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Can AND VEHICLE Start vehicle and put Mode Control in INTERIOR IS position and turn on A C Set Fan Control to High MESE Roll windows down to flush out hot air Roll windows up after hot air is flushed out Turn Mode Control to and set Fan and Temp Knobs as desired once car has cooled WARM WEATHER Set the Mode Control to 4 position and turn fis A C on in sunny weather Choose tne z7 position for cloudy or dark conditions with A C on COOL OR COLD HUMID Set the Mode Control to E position and turn 4 CONDITIONS the A C on in s
198. ine Part Transmission We recommend you use MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear Axle We recommend you use Castrol SAF XJ SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant Brake Clutch Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR Brake and Clutch Fluid DOT 4 Motor Vehicle Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR or ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Bl MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 386 MAINTENANCE CHART sssss 388 386 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CAUTION The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a driving Inspection and service should also be done fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level anytime a malfunction is suspected while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle At Each Stop For Fuel NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in terva
199. ion Center 9 Air Cleaner Filter 5 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II To meet new government regulations and promote cleaner air your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions and engine control systems When these systems are operating prop erly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any state emissions tests can be performed If the light is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass
200. ion control and reduced stability control To enter the Sport Mode mode push the ESC switch once located on the steering wheel The ESC OFF telltale will illuminate and the ESC SPORT message will display in the vehicle cluster left A STARTING AND OPERATING 265 of the odometer Refer to Driver Information Display illuminate and the ESC TRACK message will display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for in the vehicle cluster left of the odometer Refer to further information WARNING When in Sport Mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled the ESC Sport Light will illuminate and the ESC SPORT mes sage will display in the vehicle cluster When in Sport Mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced Track Mode If Equipped Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING When in Track Mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled the ESC Track Light will illuminate and the ESC TRACK mes sage will display in the vehicle cluster When in Track Mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stab
201. ious TPMS messages which display in the Driver Information Display DID e TPM Telltale Light The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 0 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on 292 STARTING AND OPERATING HN cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting And Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the rec
202. ision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are Continued 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Continued designed to open only when the air bags are inflating e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions air bags won t deploy at all Al ways wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts Ad vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Ad vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and da
203. isit UconnectPhone com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in structions 2 Reduce background noise Wind and passenger con versations are examples of noise that may impact recognition 3 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver 4 Each time you give a Voice Command you must first push either the VR or Phone button wait until after the beep then say your Voice Command 5 You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Two buttons are all you need to control your Uconnect Basic Voice Commands o eyar voee The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system Push the VR button vr After the beep say e Cancel to stop a current voice session a Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands e Repeat to listen to the system prompts again Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system s status Cues appear on the touch screen Voice Recognition VR Phone Buttons 1 Push To Begin Radio Media Navigation Apps And Climate Functions 2 Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call Send Or Re ceive A Text 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL UconnectPhone Phone R
204. jury As an added precaution when parking the vehicle turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade To apply the parking brake grasp the handle and pull it rearward until you feel resistance To release the parking brake grasp the handle and pull it slightly while pushing the button on the end of the handle When the button drops into the handle releasing the lock guide the handle downward to its stop and then release the button and the handle The Brake System Warning Light in the instrument cluster will turn on when the ignition is in the ON RUN position and the parking brake is applied NOTE e This light only shows that the parking brake is applied or a brake ABS system fault It does not show the degree of brake application If the Brake System Warning Light is illuminated when the parking brake is not applied please see your authorized dealer Each time the parking brake is applied the instrument cluster will automatically go to the highest illumina tion setting regardless of the dimmer control setting A STARTING AND OPERATING 257 WARNING BRAKE SYSTEM e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a systems loses normal capability the remaining numb
205. ke the door arm rest or instru ment panel a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 e The front passenger leans forward sideways or turns The OCS determines the front passenger s most probable to face the rear of the vehicle classification If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated improperly the occupant may provide an output ER signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant s properly seated weight input for example The front passenger s seatback is not in the full upright position The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated e g backpack box etc Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and center console Accessories that may change the seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat e Anything that may decrease or increase the front passenger s seated weight 022665795 Not Seated Properly 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 022665796 022665798 Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING e If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated improperly the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occu pant s properly seated weight input This may result in serious injury or death in a collision Always wear your seat belt and sit prop
206. ked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off a unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Vehicle Security Warning Light If Equipped Red Telltale Light What It Means Vehicle Security Warning Light e This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flas
207. l components or negatively impact vehicle perfor Checking Oil Level mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must repair center be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to Continued check the oil level is approximately five minutes after a 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter before starting the engine after it has sat overnight vals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will whichever occurs first give you an incorrect reading Engine Oil S lection Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground also will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Add oil only when the level is below the SAFE mark For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the CAUTION requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS 12633 The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or 0W 40 or equivalent engine oil loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
208. l be available e Display Mode This feature will allow you to select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status press and re lease the Auto or Manual button on the touchscreen Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen or push the back button on the faceplate e Display Brightness With Headlights ON This feature will allow you to select the display bright ness when the headlights are on Adjust the brightness with the and setting buttons on the touchscreen then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen or push the back button on the faceplate NOTE The usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness With Head lights OFF control even though the headlights are on e Display Brightness With Headlights OFF This feature will allow you to select the display bright ness when the headlights are off Adjust the brightness with the and setting buttons on the touchscreen then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen or push the back button on the faceplate e Set Theme If Equipped This feature will allow you to choose a theme for the display screen The theme will change the background color highlight color and button color of the display screen e Set Language This feature will allow you to select one of the languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR
209. l damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel Continued a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 WARNING Continued e Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex In case of an allergic reaction or rash consult a phy sician immediately Keep Tire Service Kit out of WARNING Continued Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source e A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warn ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth imme diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit A Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respiratory irritation Flush immedi ately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as
210. lant antifreeze or any globally compat Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine maintenance intervals coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh Continued a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 CAUTION Continued OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 that al lows extended maintenance intervals This engine cool ant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reduc ing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conform ing to MS 90032 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze
211. lapsed Time Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the informa tion 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Trip B If Equipped vip gt Push and release UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the DID The Trip B information will display the following Distance Average Speed Elapsed Time Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the informa tion Audio Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio display icon is high x lighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the active source Stored Messages Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Messages Menu item is high lighted in the DID This feature shows the number of stored warning messages Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are When no messages are present main menu icon will be a closed envelope A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Battery Upper Left e Coolant Temperature e None Upper Right e Compass e None e Temperature e Compass Range To Empty RTE e Temperature e o Average Fuel Range To Empty RTE e Current Fuel Average Fuel e Trip A e Current Fuel e Trip B e Trip A e Elapsed Time e Trip B Oil Pressure e e Elapsed Time Oil Temperature Oil Pressure 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Oil Temperature
212. le to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this waming may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you brake pedal several times to dry the brakes e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Cautions CAUTION and Warnings before doing so e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 253 CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CN effects POWER STEERING e Driving through standing water may cause damage to your
213. ll be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid Windshield Washers To use the windshield washer push the washer knob located on the end of the multifunction lever inward to the second detent Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is released from this position If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released It will then resume the intermit tent interval previously selected If the washer knob is pushed while in the off position the wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob is released To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on after
214. ll children whose weight or height is above the After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle do forward facing limit for the child seat should use a not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts because it can loosen the child restraint attach fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held ments Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position When the vehicle seat has been adjusted reinstall the child restraint e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in in the vehicle by the seat belt the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause infant or child restraint It could come loose in a serious personal injury collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend o
215. ls exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever comes first e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 387 Once A Month o Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before your next scheduled service Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct Operation At Each Oil Change NOTE Also inspect the exhaust system if you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the Change the engine oil filter Inspect the exhaust system exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle Inspect the brake hoses Inspect the suspension components Lubricate door hinges and check springs Check the engine coolant level hoses and clamps Check power steering fluid level 388 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN MAINTENANCE CHART eolelololo ojojoj o elololojoloelolo ololo olololo S leje oleojeo jejeo joje oleoejo o eoe o S S SIS S IS S S 8S Miles aeje e eje a ajeae ae ej a a a a 8 e lolzclolo lalo lt ls o N o y gogiodudico c xoB2o osuy jo ziood Stisqsq als saizisa j M o co w ct olojlo r r ojlolo 9 9 rw woe o xz m Or Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42
216. luid Refer to Flu ids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Rear Axle Axle Lubricant Level Check Check the exterior of the axle for evidence of gear oil leakage every 12 months or 6 000 miles 10 000 km This check should be made with the vehicle level and on the ground or raised on an axle and wheel type hoist The axle lubricant level should be between the bottom of the filler plug and a point approximately 3 8 inch 9 5 mm below the filler plug If adding axle lubricant use only the manufacturer s recommended axle lubricant Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 CAUTION Using axle fluid other than the manufactured recom mended fluid may cause a shudder noise issue refer to Fluids Lubes And Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Change Axle Lubricant Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals Change the lubricant immediately if contaminated with water See your authorized dealer for service Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seas
217. luminate when a door is ajar open and not fully closed Trunk Open Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means ar Trunk Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MN Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly LS Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev eral typical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing When the engine is running the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be ser viced as soon as possible if this occurs A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 CAUTION Prolonged driving with the
218. m n 278 l BRAKE SYSTEM sees dieser eme 257 Tire Inflation Pressures o oooooo o 279 Brake Pad Break In o ooo oo ooooo 258 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 281 E ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 259 Radial Ply fires oo oooooooooo 281 Anti Lock Brake System 259 Tre Types caesa he ee Perdor e 282 Traction Control System TCS 262 Run Flat Tires If Equipped 283 Electronic Stability Control 262 Spare Tires If Equipped oooooo 283 E TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 266 Tite Spinning eese 244 pushes ES Rep s 286 Tire Markings llli 266 Tread Wear Indicators ooooooo o 286 Tire Identification Number TIN 270 Lite OF Wire vs 287 Tire Terminology And Definitions 272 Replacement Tires ooooooooooooo 288 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 273 W TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 290 E TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 278 W TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 290 A STARTING AND OPERATING 237 ll TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 291 Premium SysteM ooooooooooooo ooo 294 M FUEL REQUIREMENTS 297 SAL Engine oooooooccrcccncono cm 297 Reformulated Gasoline 297 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 298 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 298 MMT In Gasoline o oo
219. mage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger Occupant Classification System OCS Front Passenger Seat The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle It is designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant s seated weight It is designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a category other than a properly seated adult This could be a child teenager or even an adult WARNING e If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated improperly the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS th
220. me Running Lights The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when ever the engine is running and the park brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving NOTE If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 0315041624 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective A Turn Signal On message will appear in the Driver Information Display DID and a continuou
221. n or loose particles 312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 0605005441 0605075195 Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be nut bolt has been tightened twice sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated against the wheel a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313 WARNING Tire Service Kit Storage The Tire Service Kit is located in the left side of the trunk To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED Small punctures up to 1 4 inch 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately 4 F 20 C This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 90 km h Tire Service Kit Location 314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses AS amp Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode Selecting Air Mode A Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to this p
222. nd completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn A off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light continues to flash when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Red Telltale Light What It Means Electric Power Steering Fail Warning el This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS Power Steering System Re fer to Power Steering in Starting and Operating for further information Oil Temperature Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Oil Temperature Warning Light E This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high If the light turns on while driving stop the tn vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 Door Open Warning Light Red Telltale Light 8 What It Means Door Open Warning Light This indicator will il
223. nd Hose Replacement 1 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 clear in color 2 Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle 3 Push the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES housing 5 Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so WARNING that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when the front of the housing Push the bottle into the ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the ignition switch is ON You can be hurt by the fan bottle is locked into place e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it 6 Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end started Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its converter and once the engine has started ignite storage area located on the bottom of the air pump e ardeat tan egi iia 7 Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This vehicle type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands
224. nd Vehicle Stability e Economy e Tread Wear e Ride Comfort Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 279 WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering NOTE e Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor mal wear patterns and reduced tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door 280 STARTING AND OPERATING HN At least once a month e Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judg
225. ne speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Red Telltale What It Means Light If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emer gencies Oil Pressure Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the NY engine is started if the bulb does not come on have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light rae What It Means Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected while the engine is running the light will either stay on or flash de pending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely a
226. ng conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors liftgate and hood for unauthorized entry and the ignition for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting It will also sound the horn and flash the park lights and taillights Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals flashing lights after 15 minutes and then rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition system is in the OFF position 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle e Push the LOCK button on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passen ger door open e Push the LOCK the button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them Entering The Liftgate With The S
227. nger Seat Occupant Status Front Passen ger Advanced Air Bag Dis abled Indicator Light PAD Status Front Passenger Air Bag Status Unoccupied NOT ILLUMI DEACTIVATED seat NATED Grocery bags PASSENGER DEACTIVATED heavy brief AIR BAG OFF cases and other relatively light objects Rearward facing PASSENGER DEACTIVATED infant seat AIR BAG OFF Child including PASSENGER DEACTIVATED a child seated in AIR BAG OFF a forward facing child re straint or booster seat Small adult PASSENGER DEACTIVATED AIR BAG OFF Properly seated NOT ILLUMI ACTIVATED adult NATED a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING Continued Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the Passenger Ad vanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the PAD System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated Tt is possible for a child to be classified as an adult allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system including a rear facing child restraint in this vehicle WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury
228. nger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Seat Belt Systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the insid
229. nimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less tion before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the Wiper Operation windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first when the vehicle is restarted detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents operation or to the second detent past the intermittent the windshield wiper blades from returning to the settings for high speed wiper operation off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving Mist Feature through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle is needed push the washer knob Continued a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 located on the end of the multifunction lever inward to the first detent and release The wipers will cycle one time and automatically shut off NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid wi
230. nly dis play ready when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30 MPH 48 km h G Force When selected this screen displays all four G Force values two lateral and two longitudinal as well as steering angle When a G Force greater than zero is measured the display will update the value real time Gauges 1 When selected this screen displays the following values e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Battery Voltage Displays the actual battery voltage Gauges 2 When selected this screen displays the following values e Coolant Temperature Displays the actual coolant temperature Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 e Intake Air Temperature Displays the actual intake air temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Battery Voltage Displays the actual battery voltage Engine When selected this screen displays the following values e Speed mph Displays the actual speed e Horsepower hp Displays the actual horsepower e Torque ft lb Displays the actual torque e Oil Pressure psi Displays the actual oil pressure Options When selected this screen allows you to set your SRT home page picture and configure the vehicle color shown in the G Force screen UCONNECT RADIOS IF EQUIPPED For detailed information about your Uconnect r
231. ns in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoul der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the seat belt a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Continued WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make y
232. nt or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to become inoperable After using an after market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Low Fuel Indicator Light Yellow Telltale What It Means Light Low Fuel Indicator Light B When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added Anti Lock Brake ABS Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Anti Lock Brake ABS Indicator Light After the ignition is turned on the Anti Lock Brake System ABS light illuminates to indi 653 cate function check at
233. ntil the seat belts are buckled The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled The driver should instruct all occu pants to buckle their seat belts Change Of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat if equipped in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho rized dealer FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti vating BeltAlert NOTE If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with out board front passenger seat BeltAlert is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positio
234. o avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION Direct contact of air fresheners insect repellents suntan lotions or hand sanitizers to the plastic painted or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage Wipe away immediately 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol based and or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats as damage to the seat may result Leather Or Vinyl Seat Trim Care And Cleaning Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather surface and should be removed immediately with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking the leather with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean
235. o o o o ooo ooo oo 297 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 41 Upholstery Cate o ooooooocoocmcccmo mo ooo 362 Vanity MItTOIS 5 aes Euch eer geb ra a a 97 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 5 e erem yes 274 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Security Alarm Security Alarm 17 Vehicle Storage aus eR a dem OR a 213 374 Vinyl Tia at ERR era 362 Viscosity Engine Oil s se ssa koc sota Nasii 339 380 Voice Recognition System VR o o o o 215 Warning Flasher Hazard sastre tie s Puao eeuna 310 Warnings And Cautions 0000 6 Warranty Information 0005 398 Washer Adding Eluid mera eter epe 346 Washers Windshield 113 346 Washing Vehicle secs eR RR RR bn 359 Water Driving Through sd RR Rs 251 Wheel And Wheel Trim zie net 360 Wheel And Wheel Trim Cate o o o o o o 360 A INDEX 419 Window Fogging ec 0 baai asad baai asis 213 MWIDOOWSs uris Greed aa eens a an te ha 28 POWeO E secre 6044402045648 epu Geh EE RS 28 Reset Auto Up d es s heo One Rae a 30 Windshield Defroster o o o ooooo o 87 Windshield Washers 111 113 346 Windshield Wiper Blades o o o o o o 345 Windshield Wipers o oooooocococcoooo o 111 Wiper Blade Replacement 0 0 345 Wipers Intermittent 0 0 00 111
236. o turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Lights a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer Driver Information Display DID and radio when the position lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON RUN or ACC position The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 0315041624 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II are four delay settings which allow you to regulate the CAUTION Continued In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park posi wipe interval from a mi
237. oblems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety 400 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightfor
238. of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear 5 Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in this seated position for two to three minutes after restarting the vehicle WARNING If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for an adult passenger have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Failure to do so may facing child restraint e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat e Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Lighter Weight Passengers Including Small Adults cause serious injury or death If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words PASSENGER When a lighter weight passenger including a small adult AIR BAG OFF the Passenger Advanced Front Air occupies the passenger seat the Passenger Advanced Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision Front Air Bag may be deactivated Therefore the Passen ger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be activated for a lighter weight passenger including a small adult 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In depending on size who is seated in the passenger seat This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly The driver and passenger must always use the PAD Indicator Light as a determination of whether the Pas senger Advanced Front
239. oided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty STARTING AND OPERATING 255 WARNING PARKING BRAKE Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Parking Brake Lever The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 256 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Before leaving the vehicle make sure you fully apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into REVERSE Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or in
240. ole rearward of the shift lever Opened Glove Compartment NOTE The glove compartment will lock with the door locks unless the key fob is detected inside the vehicle Center Console Cubby Bin Location 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Cargo Net Storage If Equipped Storage Bin If Equipped There is a cargo net storage area located between the There is a storage bin located between the driver and driver and passengers seat passengers seat Pull up on the release lever to open the storage bin 035271337 035270262 Cargo Net Storage Location Storage Bin Location a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision Door Storage The door panels contain storage areas located in the lower center area of the door panel 035270265 Door Panel Storage 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster m Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements ste The rear window defroster button is located on e Use care when washing the inside of the rear the climate control panel Push this button to turn window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on on the rear window defroster An indicator in the button the interior surface of the
241. ome of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Seat Belt Systems e Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Air Bags e Child Restraints Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat 2 If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child restraint must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints 3 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly Refer to Child Restraints should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older chil dren who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat 4 Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly The driver and front passe
242. ommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to urn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the A STARTING AND OPERATING 293 TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and waming have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor
243. on Printed in U S A
244. ons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Wheel And Wheel Trim Care Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint AIN wheels and wheel uim especially atumibum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish y 6 P To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non CAUTION abrasive non acidic cleaner CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning ma
245. ontrol of your vehicle You could have a collision STREET RACE MODE IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with a two mode electronic controlled damping system This system allows for a compliant street suspension damping setting or a firmer race suspension damping setting When in street mode 246 STARTING AND OPERATING Ia NOTE the system will automatically shift the suspension damp ers to the firmer Race damping setting during some hard acceleration and braking situations There are two modes of operation e Street Mode This mode will give a sporty but comfortable ride This mode is driver selectable when the vehicle is placed in STREET mode push the STREET button on the Instrument Panel This mode is intended for a smoother ride on the various types of pavement and road conditions while still providing damping levels appropriate extreme capabilities Race Mode This mode is driver selectable when the vehicle is placed in RACE mode push the RACE button on the Instrument Panel This mode is for track use only and will supply maximum grip to the tires e e With the ignition in the ON RUN position the sus pension damping system will be in the last mode the system was in when the vehicle was turned off The driver can select either Street or Race damping mode at any time The suspension mode will lock and stay in whatever the driver selects even when the ignition is turned off and the car r
246. oor handle NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 0202006716 Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Push and release the UNLOCK e button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock both doors and the liftgate The park lights and turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 and the illuminated entry system will turn on Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information NOTE The Door Unlock Indicator v will illuminate in the instrument cluster when one or both doors are unlocked Remote Key Unlock Driver Door Both Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information
247. oor under the front pas modifications to the front passenger seat components senger seat may prevent the OCS from working assembly or to the seat cover If the seat trim cover or properly which may result in serious injury or death in a collision Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat If there is a fault present in the OCS both the PAD cushion needs service for any reason take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may be used Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will The following requirements must be strictly followed illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or Front Air Bag is deactivated Should this occur the components in any way Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deac tivated until the fault is cleared This indicates that Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the for service immediately specific model being repaired Always use the correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com ponents that may affect Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation In order for the OCS to properly classify the Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an aftermarket seat cover or cushion Do not ad
248. opriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the DID s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure NOTE Pushing the LEFT arrow button will override the DID pop up messages and return you to the menu screen e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen An example of this message type is Automatic High Beams On aa UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 Driver Information Display DID Messages e e e e e e e e Front Seat Belts Unbuckled Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled Key Fob Battery Low Service Air Bag System ESC Status ESC OFF ESC ON ESC SPORT
249. or 3G data network connection NOTE e Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber Once a connection is made between the vehicle s 9 1 1 Call system and the 9 1 1 operator the 9 1 1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed Once the 9 1 1 operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle s 9 1 1 Call system the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle The vehicle s 9 1 1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9 1 1 operator until the 9 1 1 operator terminates the connection WARNING e If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger e g fire or smoke is visible dangerous road conditions or location do not wait for voice contact from a 9 1 1 operator All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location Continued a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 WARNING Continued Never place anything on or near the vehicle s oper able 1X voice data or 3G data network and GPS antennas You could prevent operable 1X voice data or 3G data network and GPS signal reception which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call An operable 1X voice data or 3G data network and GPS signal reception is re quired for the 9 1 1 Call system to function properly The 9 1 1 Call system is embedde
250. or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE The battery is located underneath an access panel inside the rear compartment on the left side of the vehicle A remote battery terminal is located in the engine compartment for jump starting Battery Location 1 Positive Battery Post 2 Negative Battery Post Connecting The Jumper Cables 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without allowing the vehicles to touch one an other Set the parking brake place the transmission in NEU TRAL and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads Remove the plastic fuse cover to gain access to the remote jump start positive post in the engine compartment Refer to the following illustration for remote jump starting connections WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325 Remote Jump Start Connections 1 Remote Positive Post 2 Remote Negative Post 326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Connect the positi
251. ore the settings to their default setting press the Restore Settings button A pop up will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default select Yes to restore or Cancel to exit Once the settings are restored a pop up appears stating settings reset to default Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit Clear Personal Data After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings button on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail able e Clear Personal Data When this feature is selected it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets To remove personal information press the Clear Personal Data button and a pop up will appear asking Are you sure you want to clear all personal data select OK to Clear or Cancel to exit Once the data has been cleared a pop up appears stating Personal data cleared A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 System Information WARNING After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Per formance Pages is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be done on any public When System Information is selected a System Informa roadways It is recommended that these features be tion screen will appear displaying the system software used in a controlled environment and
252. ore times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Buttons On The Touchscreen Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect display Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings Uconnect 8 4 System Settings Press the Apps button on the touchscreen then press the Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Voice Clock Safety amp Driving Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Engine Off Options Audio Phone Bluetooth SiriusXM Setup Restore Set tings Clear Personal Data and System Information NOTE Only one category may be selected at a time To adjust the setting of a programmable feature press the desired setting option Once in the desired setting option press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Display After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the following settings wil
253. osition for air pump operation only Use the Black Air Pump Hose 7 when selecting this mode Selecting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and 060410595 Ti ice Ki turn to this position to inject the Tire ire Service It Components Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the 1 Sealant Bottle 5 Mode Select Knob tire Use the Sealant Hose clear hose 2 Deflation Button 6 Sealant Hose Clear 6 when selecting this mode 3 Pressure Gauge 7 Air Pump Hose Black 4 Power Button 8 Power Plug located on the bot tom side of the Tire Service Kit WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button 4 once to turn On the Tire Service Kit Push and release the Power Button 4 again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit Using The Deflation Button Push the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ic Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location e The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer e Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the system Refer to Sealin
254. our injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of the seat belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Continued 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Continued Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The seat belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body without twists If you can t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed Continued WARNING Continued A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing inter nal injuries Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you e A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far for
255. oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path In full on mode ESC utilizes sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position STARTING AND OPERATING 263 e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than Electronic Stability Control ESC Operating appropriate for the steering wheel position Modes The ESC system may have five available operating WARNING modes The Electronic Stability Control System ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent all accidents including those resulting from exces sive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro priate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others
256. oyment id see Ae sra ed 46 Ait Bag Light ooo a sway Rer pida 68 87 149 Air Bag Maintenance 000 0000 70 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 340 Air Conditioner Maintenance 343 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 214 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 343 344 Air Conditioning SysteM o ooooooooooo ass 343 Air Pressure Tires o o ooo ooo oo 279 Alarm Security Alarm 2 2 0 0 0 00000 152 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 A 6 ite og en hed 6 Gy oh eg ae SR GU 206 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 350 380 Capacities sis dador s resp ta 380 Disposal arem fret repens mee 353 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 259 Anti Lock Warning Light oo oo o o o 261 Appearance Care iria du e reges a e aes 359 Auto Down Power Windows sess 29 a INDEX 405 Automatic Door LockS 27 28 Automatic HeadlightS ooooooooooo oo 106 Auto Unlock Doors o ooo eee 28 Auto Up Power Windows 00004 30 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 132 Auxiliary Power Outlet ise eserita adnan asas 132 Battery 4s atv ea ees ai vox ege 153 341 Charging System Light 153 Emergency Starting 000 323 Jump Starting 2 0 isses eee t rh n 323 Keyless Transmitter Re
257. per cable from the remote positive post of the vehicle with the discharged battery If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between 1st gear and REVERSE while gently pushing the accelerator Use the least amount of pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN CAUTION WARNING e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener tween Ist gear and REVERSE do not spin the ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain even failure of the axle and tires A tire could damage may result explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
258. placement RKE 23 LOCO aaa IR Der Xue SCR aS 341 Remote Battery Replacement 23 Saving Feature Protection 342 Storing Vehicle 26224 ove nea is 342 Transmitter Battery Replacement 23 Belts Seal eie oo ade aes eR een 87 Body Mechanism Lubricati0N 345 B Pillar Location 2 0 0 be eaea ee es 273 Brake Control System Electronic 259 Brake Parking oes itani tormi RES 255 Brake System ism ep RR ERR des 257 355 Anti Lock ABS oooo ocococooooo ooo 257 259 Fluid Check 54 uk deerant Pia 355 383 Master Cylinder cessie soe eoe ees 355 Warning Light o oooooooooo oo 150 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 258 Brightness Interior Lights o 110 Bulb Replacement 379 Bulbs Light iiia ser RR Rn 88 377 Camera Rear 121 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 380 Capacities FlUid ooooooooommoooo oo 380 Caps Filler Oil Engine rere ao oa 339 Power Steering raid ia ds nd a 254 406 INDEX IN Radiator Coolant Pressure 352 Carbon Monoxide Warning 86 301 Car Washes estres piba ede ane awe boi ase 359 Chains Tire seser hw baa ah ada es Cs 290 Chart Dre SiZing axes Pia eh es 268 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 334 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 85 Checks Salety c xa pais
259. quipped After pressing the SiriusXM Setup button on the touch screen the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re subscribe 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U S residents only Restore Settings After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Restore Settings When this feature is selected it will reset the Display Clock Audio and Radio Settings to their default settings To rest
260. quipped with an auxiliary power jumper allowing an electronic device to be directly connected to the vehicle without having to use the console power outlets Power to the device will be controlled by the ignition switch NOTE The electronic device must draw less than five amps to prevent damage To install remove the mirror cover by pulling straight down and separating the cover pieces a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Connect the auxiliary port jumper into the unused con Re install the mirror cover and be sure to not pinch the nector taped to the wiring bundle Connect the other end wires that go into the electronic device of the auxiliary port jumper to the electronic device NOTE The red wire in the bundle is the power wire and will provide the positive 12 volts to the electronic device 0415060313 Mirror Cover Installation Auxiliary Port Jumper 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II CUPHOLDERS IF EQUIPPED STORAGE There are two cupholders located in the rear of the center Glove Compartment console An electronic glove compartment is located on the pas senger side of the instrument panel Push in the button to open the glove compartment Center Console Cupholders 035270266 Glove Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Console Features Console Cubby Bin If Equipped An open storage area or cubby bin is located in the center cons
261. r The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance 402 WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure
262. r in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly push and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed 6 Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate push the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Rolling Code To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995
263. r than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed push the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button manually accelerating 10 mph 16 km h above the set speed or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with out erasing the set speed memory Pushing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pus
264. ramming Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed e To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Canadian Gate Operator To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate push and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes
265. ransmitter Battery Replacement 23 Radio Op ration reca sown Re sos Io atem a 206 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 204 Radio Sound Systems oooooooomooooo oo 203 Replacement Keys i cioe bm tanase E s 15 Rear Camera a iex sega ce ears iire nieis 121 Replacement Parts cps cocasses tiganie asar 336 A INDEX 415 Replacement Tir s sose sarsii iea anaia ei ae ia 288 Reporting Safety Defects o o 399 Restraint Head oo oo o 102 Restraints Child ooooooo oo 72 Restraints Occupant 2 6 6 6 eee 33 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 327 Rotation Tires 4 429 is 0 290 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 87 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 88 Safety Defects Reporting ooooooooo ooo 399 Safety Exhaust GaS o ooooo ooo ooo oo oooooo 86 Safety Information Tir8 o o o o oo oo 266 Safety TIPS nc sese ee re rh 85 Schedule Maintenance o o 385 386 Seat Belt Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 44 Energy Management Feature 44 Lap Shoulder Belt Operati0N 39 Lap Shoulder BeltS o ooooooooo o o 36 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting 41 Pregnant Women sso seca e ba rra eee 43 Seat Belt Extender llle 42 Seat Belt Pretensioner o o ooooo oo oo 43 Seat Belt Reminder 0 00000 eee 3
266. read life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance interval Remember more frequent rotation is permissible if desired Also correct for anything caus ing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation NOTE Each wheel on your vehicle contains a tire pres sure sensor The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS learns the location of each sensor though system pro gramming Although not required the manufacturer recommends reprogramming the TPMS after rotating the tires so that the system can relearn each sensor s location See your authorized dealer for system reprogramming The front and rear tires are different sizes and cannot be used in place of each other Rotate the tires side to side as shown in the diagram 81f10b20 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 291 readings to the receiver module It is particularly impor tant for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pres sure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Var
267. recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Fuel Selection We recommend you use Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher 0 10 Ethanol 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon as possible Continued CAUTION Continued Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended aaa MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genu
268. rns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN WARNING Engine exhaust internal combustion engines only some of its constituents and certain vehicle compo nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 399 MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual pr
269. s before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CAUTION Continued The pages that follow contain the required maintenance Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids services determined by the engineers who designed your that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo Maintenance Schedule there are other components nents as the chemicals can damage your engine which may require servicing or replacement in the future transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could fluid for the flushing procedure result in more costly repairs damage to other Engine Oi
270. s chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light and the trunk light To restore interior light operation either place the ignition in the ON RUN position or cycle the light switch 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Dimmer Controls The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel Rotating the dimmer control upward with the parking lights or headlights on will increase the brightness of the instru ment panel lights and ambient lighting Dimmer Control Interior Light Control Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent t
271. s immediately above the latch plate Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE Seat Belt Extender WARNING If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly even when Ev the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a belt system DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender Seat Belt Extender The Seat Belt Extender should be used if when worn the distance between the front edge only if the existing seat belt is not long enough When the of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu pant it must be removed the occupant s body is LESS than 6 inches Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 0226075266 Pregnant Women And Sea
272. s not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire A STARTING AND OPERATING 271 EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 272 STARTING AND OPERATING IE Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined
273. s you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal Damage to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator pedal when shifting The six speed manual transmission has a spring that centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear This spring helps you know which gear you are in when you are shifting Be careful when shifting from first to second or downshifting from sixth to fifth A STARTING AND OPERATING 243 The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and NOTE fourth gear Make sure you move the shift lever into second or fifth gear If you let the shift lever move in the direction of the pulling you may end shifting from first to fourth or from sixth to third gear You will find it easier to use only the lower gears for most city driving For steady highway driving with light accelerations sixth gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse inhibitor system When vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h the reverse inhibitor activates to help prevent shifts into REVERSE When at a complete stop you may notice light shift efforts into REVERSE with
274. sible wedge of water to build up between the tire and road 4 Keep tires properly inflated surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are DRIVING THROUGH WATER slushy 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop Driving through water more than a few inches 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle CAUTION Driving your vehicle through deep puddles at speeds over 5 mph 8 km h may cause water to be ingested into the engine This can cause severe engine dam age 252 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Flowing Rising Water WARNING WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the and cause your vehic
275. speed exceeds 5 mph 8 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The driver door is opened 3 The doors were not previously unlocked Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control both of the door windows 021970400 Power Window Switches a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 There are single window controls on the passenger door WARNING Continued trim panel which operate the passenger door window The window controls will operate only when the ignition ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter is in the ACC or ON RUN position N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occupants particularly unattended children can become en trapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death The power window switc
276. ssure 1 is lower than the recommended value and or that slow pressure loss is occurring In these gt cases optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed Should two or more tires be in the condition mentioned above the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 Yellow Telltale Light What It Means In any situation in which the message on the display is See manual it is ESSENTIAL to refer to the contents of the Wheels paragraph in the Technical data chapter strictly com plying with the indications that you find there IMPORTANT Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised Stop the vehicle avoiding sharp braking and steering Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that
277. switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 030971329 Power Seat Switch a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward The seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward Push the power seat recliner switch forward or rearward the seatback will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position
278. system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN feature Refer to the Customer Programmable Fea tures Uconnect System Settings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or high humid ity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control button Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control knob when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in
279. t 395 Service Contract cis cosa re 397 Prepare A List sse cope RR eS 395 M WARRANTY INFORMATION 398 Be Reasonable With Requests 395 B MOPAR PARTS sellers eese 399 E IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 395 M REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 399 FCA US LLC Customer Center 396 In The 50 United States And Washington D C 399 O FCA Canada Inc Customer Center 396 O In Canada occa eei sae n y rr 399 In Mexico Contact 0002 eee 397 Mi PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 400 394 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades cae ti are io eai Ea 00000 401 TIRE QUALITY GRADES 401 Treadweat xam bits ria 401 Temperature Grades ooo oo o ooo 402 a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 395 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that
280. t Belts Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Man agement feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event o
281. t Rest o ooo o 117 Programming A Non Rolling Code 127 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Canadian Gate Operator Programming 128 BM CUPHOLDERS IF EQUIPPED 455i 136 Using Homelink oooooooooo ooo 130 BM STORAGE 93000091 ve ERE T eS 136 SECUT Y wd sk ice ada capa hee Ad 130 Glove Compartment 00 136 Troubleshooting Tips o oo o o o 130 Console Features o o o ooooo ooo oo 137 8 General Informati0N o o o o oooooo 131 Door Storage muevas src PERG As 139 B ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS 132 W REAR WINDOW FEATURES 140 Auxiliary Jumper Harness 134 Rear Window Defroster o oo o 140 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature will be defaulted on and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse 030471324 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a 9 1 1 button a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 WARNING ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road Some Uconnect Access services including 9 1 1 and Assist will NOT work without an operable 1X voice data or 3G data network connection NOTE
282. t aaan 310 Headlights Axutomatie 31 sog oea a eder BR RE aue 106 Delay so 4 Fo pes RR a eR SEDE A RU 106 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 109 Lights On Reminder siis 107 On With Wipers o oo o o o o o oo oo ooo 106 114 PASSING messem Senes dre ey 109 Wicca eee og 105 Time Delay zi sedere Behe er te ao bore ae a 106 Head Restraints ooooooooooooooooooo ooo 102 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 109 Holder Cup acte ants ot e iem dia 136 HomeLink Garage Door Opener 123 Hood Release c3 tod oes em 9 ex ehe tes 103 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid 358 Illuminated Edy iii 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key ooooooooo oo 14 Inside Rearview MirTOT ooooooo momo 92 Instrument Cluster 145 152 156 167 Instrument Panel And Controls 144 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 363 Interior Appearance Care ilis 361 Interior Lights sesca crepas seori aia eeii 109 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 111 Introduction s esr ee I irs RR Rn 4 Jump Starting is sess eee nns 323 Key Pob css ta oet und on sce a DR ete 11 Programming Additional Key Fobs 16 Programming Additional Transmitters 16 Remote Battery Replacement A INDEX 411 Key In Reminder iix e res 13 Keyless Entry SysteM o oo oooooo ooo 11 20 Keyless GO eid rd dad Sx EUR bao 11 Key Replacement cios iaa
283. t cause harmful interference pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation Continued 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Your vehicle is equipped with two 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet that can be used to power cellular phones small electronics and other low powered electrical acces sories One power outlet is located on the center console to the right of the shifter Push down on the power outlet to access the opening Push down on it again to close This power outlet is powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC position Front Power Outlet The second power outlet is located between the seat backs above the cup holders This power outlet is con nected directly by the battery and powered at
284. ted Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks button on the touch screen the following settings will be available a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 e Auto Door Locks When this feature is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press the Auto Door Locks button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press the Auto Unlock On Exit button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Flash Lights With Lock When this feature is selected the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry Feature To make your selection press the Flash Lights With
285. tem check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status Some telltales are optional and may not appear 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IN Red Telltale Indicator Lights Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains un buckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occu pant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 Air Bag Warning Light E What It Means Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is O first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on ry while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Brake Warning Light Red Telltale Light BRAKE What It Means Brake Warning Light
286. terials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will 5P Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing compounds They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken t
287. that all the other services are switched off surfaces This is also a normal result of the carbon fiber and or disengaged process e If the replaced fuse blows again contact an autho rized dealer FUSES WARNING When replacing a blown fuse always use an ap propriate replacement fuse with the same amp e If a general protection fuse for safety systems air bag system braking system power unit systems engine system gearbox system or steering system blows contact an authorized dealer rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other Continued Power Distribution Center The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle This center contains fuses and relays MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 Power Distribution Center Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 3 40 Amp Green m Rad Fan 4 40 Amp Green Rad Fan Rly High 5 40 Amp Green ABS ESP Pump Feed 6 40 Amp Green Starter 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 7 40 Amp Green CBC Ext Lighting 1 8 40 Amp Green CBC Ext Lighting 2 9 30 Amp Pink CBC Lighting Washer Pump 10 30 Amp Pink CBC Power Lock 11
288. that has a seat belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted 3 Allow the seat belt to retract As the seat belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode WARNING Continued Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it only used to install rear facing or forward facing to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking a i child restraints that have a harness for restraining Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency the child locking mode Supplemental Restraint System SRS WARNING e The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR fea ture or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according
289. the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering Electronic Immobilization System The Electronic Immobilization system prevents unau thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights will turn on whenever a door is opened or the liftgate is opened and the dimmer switch is not in the defeat position The interior lights will turn on remain on for approxi mately 30 seconds and then fade to off if any of the following occur A door is opened using the outside door handle and then closed 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e A door is unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The interior lights will turn on remain on for about four seconds and then fade to off if a door is opened using the inside d
290. the end of hose 7 onto the valve stem 4 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance 322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 Bar or higher 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver side door opening NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated push the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing 2 Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center 5 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has been repaired 6 Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos sible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace ment NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the autho rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit F Sealant Bottle A
291. the ignition in the ON position and increased shift efforts into REVERSE with the ignition in the OFF position This is normal operation of the transmission reverse inhibitor system Shifting gears during cold weather may require an increased effort until the transmission lubricant is warm This is normal and not harmful to the transmis sion Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain a certain amount of noise from the transmission is normal This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged 244 STARTING AND OPERATING HN clutch pedal released but it may also be heard when driving The noise may also be more noticeable when the transmission is warm This noise is normal and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission e You must always use first gear or REVERSE when starting from a standing position CAUTION Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete stop before shifting into REVERSE Failure to do so may result in transmission damage Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed below Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions relatively steady speeds will result in increased fuel economy and may be used as indicated MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS 14 4 5 5 6 mph 1
292. the leather Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly must be taken tohwoid seratching the lashe ENNEEENERERERNNNNRNRNRNRNRNR must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic WARNING 1 Clean with a wet soft cloth A mild soap solution may frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and be used but do not use high alcohol content or leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts clean damp cloth Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt 2 Dry with a soft cloth assemblies
293. the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TILT STEERING COLUMN The tilt release lever is located below the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column To tilt the column simply pull the release lever rearward toward you and then move the steering wheel upward or down ward as desired When the column is in the desired position push the release lever forward to lock the column firmly in place 031771769 Tilt Steering Column Lever a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 WARNING The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the steering column Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ADJUSTABLE PEDALS The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature
294. tion Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 Total weight your vehicle can carry 3 Tire size designed for your vehicle 4 Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual A STARTING AND OPERATING 275 NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this manual 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and T ine th i loadi iti f E o determine the maximum loading conditions of your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas EN
295. tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The DID will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Gulf Coast Countries GCC TPMS TRA REGISTERED No ER0097573 12 DEALER No DA0047074 10 A STARTING AND OPERATING 297 CORAX3 TRA REGISTERED No ER37066 15 DEALER No DA0047074 10 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 8 4L Engine The 8 4L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations provide optimal fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality
296. to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex ceeds 8 mph 13 km h the transmission is shifted into PARK or the vehicle s ignition is cycled to the OFF position When the Vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned OFF the rear camera mode is exited and the last touchscreen appears again The active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 CAUTION To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom m
297. to the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1 16 of an inch 1 6 mm When the tread is STARTING AND OPERATING 287 worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressure Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended 288 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear
298. to the proce Occupant Restraint Controller ORC dures in the Service Manual Air Bag Warning Light2 e Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Steering Wheel and Column e Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain e occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats The locked mode is Knee Impact Bolsters e Advanced Front Air Bags Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Instrument Panel Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 e Supplemental Side Air Bags e Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch Seat Track Position Sensors Occupant Classification System Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the 0226005640 driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHIC
299. ton to change the display between MPH or km h Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the following information submenus UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 Tire Pressure Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Tire Pressure is highlighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the follow ing will be displayed e If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON e If one or more tires have low pressure the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other tire pressure value e If the Tire Pressure system requires service Service Tire Pressure System is displayed Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS under Starting and Operating for further information Coolant Temperature Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Coolant Temperature is highlighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and the coolant temperature will be displayed Oil Temperature Push and release the UP or DO
300. too fast cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for may lead to transmission overheating and failure longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels ping when you are stuck And do not let anyone near above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans a spinning wheel no matter what the speed mission shifting occurring a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Do not tow with sling type equipment Only use flatbed equipment Always comply with applicable state or local towing ordinances CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 8 4L 333 ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 334 ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS esueese eee 334 B REPLACEMENT PARIS 3 4 20 ERR Ren 336 B DEALER SERVICE ue RR eos 336 E MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 337 H Engine Oil ere este eee et RR n 337 Engine Oil Filter oooooooooo 339 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 340 Maintenance Free Battery 341 Hibernation Mode s s 342 Air Conditioner Maintenance 343 Body Lubric
301. tter understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is WARNING required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties In a collision an unrestrained child can become a such as law enforcement that have the special equip projectile inside the vehicle The force required to ment can read the information if they have access to the hold even an infant on your lap could become so vehicle or the EDR great that you could not hold the child no matter Child Restraints how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all should be in a proper restraint for the child s size times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law
302. tton Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 4 AUTO Temperature Control Controls airflow temperature distribution volume and the amount of air recirculation automatically Press and release to select Refer to Automatic Operation for more information Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes 5 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Di Rear DEVOS Button CAUTION Continued Press and release this button to turn on the rear window Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped window cleaners on the interior surface of the An indicator will illuminate when the rear window window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window turns off after 10 minutes 7 Blower Control CAUTION Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to forced through the climate system T
303. ugh hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 4 8 Bar e The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi 4 8 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes e The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated push the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn off the Tire Service Kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instru ment panel 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the Tire Service Kit
304. uld be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses have latched or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In SRT ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS SRT Engine Break In Recommendations The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum performance and maximum durability for your new SRT Vehicle Despite modern technology and World Class manufac turing methods the moving parts of the vehicle must still wear in with each other This wearing in occurs mainly during the first 500 miles 805 km and continues through the first oil change interval It is recommended for the operator to observe the follow ing driving behaviors during the new vehicle break in period 0 to 100 miles 0 to 161 km Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an extended period of time e Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration Avoid aggressive braking Drive with the engine speed less than 3 500 RPM e Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph 88 km h and observe local speed limits 100 to 300 miles 161 to 483 km e Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears 1st to 3rd gears Avoid aggressive braking Drive with the engine speed less than 5 000 RPM Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph 112 km h and observe local speed limits a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE START
305. unleaded Premium gasoline having a posted octane number of 91 as specified by the R M 2 method The use of 91 or higher octane Premium gasoline is required for in this engine 800dfab While operating on gasoline with the required octane number hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern However if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound see your dealer imme diately Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended octane number can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality 298 STARTING AND OPERATING HN The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended Prop erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im proved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as ethanol CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso line containing mor
306. unny weather Choose the gd 64 696 position and turn on the A C in cloudy or dark 48 C S conditions Ope Use the position in sunny weather the position in cloudy or dark weather and the Mode Knob setting for snowy or ES very cold weather that requires extra heat to the windshield 815193c4 a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar 1 Press the Apps O button to open the App screen are easily changed for your convenience Simply follow 2 these steps Press and hold then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar 3 The replaced shortcut will now be an active App shortcut on the main menu bar WiFi potest UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS Introducing Uconnect Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help ful quick tips It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 8 4AN system SA P Radio Media Controls s Clima a Phone 0307078001 Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Main Menu 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 6 105 1 107 9 Classic Rock 94 7 HD 12 WCSX FM 94 7 WCSX Detroits audio ES Radio 0307077985 browse li o Gee OFF Ku Manager Phone Settings Climate Uconnect 8 4AN If you see the BJ icon on your touchscreen you have the Uconnect 8 4AN system Get Started 1 V
307. ure Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem perature Any reading within the normal range indi cates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem perature when driving in hot weather or up moun tain grades It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 4 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS IMPORTANT The warning indicator light switches on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes sage and or acoustic signal when applicable These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and or alternative to the information contained in the Owner Manual which you are advised to read carefully in all cases Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication All active telltales will display first if applicable The sys
308. utes or 10 minutes button on the touch screen Then press the back arrow Done button on the touchscreen e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the Up or Down arrow button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval Press the back arrow Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Audio After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available 19 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE e Balance Fade This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings Press and drag the speaker icon use the arrows to adjust or tap the C icon to readjust to the center e Equalizer This feature allows you to adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the and buttons on the touchscreen Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the Off 1 2
309. ve end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electri cal spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury Only use the specific ground point do not use any other exposed metal parts 10 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327 11 Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery 2 Disconnect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 3 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 4 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jum
310. vehicle startup If the light remains on after startup or comes on and stays on at road speeds it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has be come inoperative The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on see an authorized dealer 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE Yellow Telltale Light What It Means immediately Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting And Operating for further in formation Green Telltale Indicator Lights Park Headlight ON Indicator Light Green Telltale Light What It Means Park Headlight ON Indicator Light p q This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 Turn Signal Indicator Lights Green Tell tale Light What It Means Turn Signal Indicator Lights The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as se lected as well as the exterior turn signal lamp s front and rear as selected when the multi amp P function lever is moved down LEFT or up RIGHT NOTE e A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL H
311. ver or front passenger seat belt is buckled The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Advanced Air Bag Features This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System OCS in the front passenger seat The OCS is designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant s seated weight It is designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a category other than a properly seated adult This could be a child teenager or even an adult The Passenger Air Bag Disable PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front passenger when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated The PAD Indicator Light illuminates the words PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision NOTE When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the Passenger Air Bag Disable PAD System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a coll
312. ver the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly WARNING Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back In a crash the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly which may result in serious injury or death A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE ST
313. w Switch 66 Spare NOTE A 15 Amp fuse for the radio system is located in line at the battery positive terminal 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN VEHICLE STORAGE We recommend that you follow these guidelines for storing your vehicle for extended periods CAUTION When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Fill the fuel tank This will prevent water condensation inside the tank If you plan to store your vehicle more than two months add an anti oxidant fuel stabilizer to the fuel tank Change the oil to remove any corrosive combustion related acids in the crankcase Check that the radiator coolant level of protection is to at least 20 F 29 C Make sure that all tires are inflated to the optimum pressure Wash and wax the vehicle to protect the finish Store the vehicle in a dry well ventilated location Move the wiper blades away from the windshield
314. w direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode e Air comes from the instrument panel outlets A and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets e Floor Mode v Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side y window demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions 9 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 10 Temperature Control Down Button Push the button for cooler temperature settings 11 Temperature Control Up Button Push the button for warmer temperature settings Automatic Operation 1 Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera ture Control ATC Panel UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas senger temperature control buttons Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the
315. ward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions your strongest bones will take the force in a colli 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and sion adjust the seat e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front you from injury during a collision You are more seat and next to your arm in the rear seat for vehicles likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not equipped with a rear seat Grasp the latch plate and wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt pull out the seat belt Slide the latch plate up the are meant to be used together webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a around your lap collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be re placed immediately Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system Seat b
316. ward lan guage with illustrations diagrams and charts IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 401 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwea
317. window Use a soft cloth will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap heating elements Labels can be peeled off after proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of soaking with warm water operation push the button a second time Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 144 Driver Information Display DID Messages E INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ooo ooo oo 145 DID Selectable Menu Items ll WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS 147 B UCONNECT SETTINGS 185 Red Telltale Indicator Lights 148 Buttons On The Faceplate 186 Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights 158 Buttons On The Touchscreen 186 Green Telltale Indicator Lights 166 Customer Programmable Features Personal White Telltale Indicator Light 168 VERUS A erT E a a 186 Blue Telltale Indicator Light jj uM RM ed d ll DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY DID 170
318. with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy reduce emissions and maintain vehicle perfor mance Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits When avail able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom mended Visit www toptiergas com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials 300 STARTING AND OPERATING HN R NRA nens CAUTION Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s Most of
319. y button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active To make your selection press the Hill Start Assist button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Press the back arrow Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the or button on the touch screen to select your desired time interval Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status press the button on the touchscreen to select un Or 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE your desired time interval Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or pus
320. y if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If Driver Door is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter e Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection press the Passive Entry button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status press the O seconds 45 seconds 5 min
321. y and a right side impact deploys the right side SABIC only Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not SABICs should have deployed SABICS will not deploy in all side collisions including some collisions at certain angles or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compart ment SABICs may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy SABICs are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system SABICs deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SABICs can be seriously injured or killed Occupants including children should never lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the side air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Seat belts and child restraints where appropriate are necessary for your protection in all collisions They also help keep you in position away from an inflating SABIC To get the best protection from the SABICs occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child WARNING Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Door Integrated Side Air Bag Inflat able Curtains SABICs Do not stack luggage or Continued
322. ycling equipment should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate decklid sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will r
323. your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING Continued seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a be
324. ystem Armed NOTE Using the key to open the liftgate while the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed will trigger the alarm Push the LIFTGATE release button on the RKE transmitter twice to allow access without triggering the alarm or having to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Then within 30 seconds open the liftgate by using the key cylinder or the LIFTGATE release switch located in the exterior liftgate handle 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter e Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position e Push the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button START STOP O B ENGINE 020236152 requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle NOTE The liftgate key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior Power Door Lock switches will not unlock the doors a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle However you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door

Owners Manual Pdf

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents